235
S S S U U U M M M P P P O O O E E E L L L E E E C C C T T T R R R I I I C C C C C C O O O . . . , , , L L L T T T D D D . . . SP-L380 INSTRUCTION MANUAL AC SERVO DRIVE 400V CLASS 5.5KW~55KW Prior to initial operation, read these Instructions thoroughly,and retain for Future reference.

SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

  • Upload
    others

  • View
    1

  • Download
    0

Embed Size (px)

Citation preview

Page 1: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

SSSUUUMMMPPPOOO EEELLLEEECCCTTTRRRIIICCCCCCOOO...,,, LLLTTTDDD...

SP-L380 INSTRUCTION MANUAL

AC SERVO DRIVE

400V CLASS 5.5KW~55KW

Prior to initial operation, read these Instructions thoroughly,and retain for Future reference.

Page 2: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight
Page 3: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Contents 1.Using ■Introduction of L380.......................................... ....... .........1-1

■Receiving Confirmation.......................................... ....... .......1-2

■Overall Dimension and Install Dimension.........................................1-4

■Confirming and Managing the Install Site........................................1-5

■Installing Direction and Space.......................................... .......1-6 2.Wiring Connection

■Connect the Peripherals.........................................................2-1

■Wiring Interconnection..........................................................2-2

■Composition of Terminal Platform ..............................................2-4

■Terminal Wiring Connection of Main Loop ......................................2-5

■Explanation of Control Loop Terminals ..........................................2-13

■Check the cabling ..............................................................2-17

■Mounting and Cabling of Expanding Card ......................................2-18

3.Summery of Digital Manipulator and Parameter Group

■Digital Manipulator.................................................. ..... ....3-1

■Summery of the Parameter Group.......................................... . 3-3

4.Parameter Tables

■Reference Instruction............................................. ..... .. ... 4-1

■Group of Parameters...... ......................................... ..... .. ...4-2

■Parameter Tables...... ......................................... ..... .. . ....4-3

■Code of Multifunctional Terminal........................... ..... .. . .. 4-43

5.Alarm and Examination

■Protecting and Examining Function ............................................ .5-1

■Alarm and Malfunction Analysis ..............................................5-9

6. trial operation

■The order of the trial operation ............................................. 6-1

■The operation of the trial operation ...........................................6-2

■Adjustment guide ........................................... ................ ..6-11

7. Set Parameters According to the Function

■Adjustment of Motor Related Parameters.................................... ... 7-1

■Frequency Instruction....................................................... 7-11

■Operating Instruction .................................... ................. 7-16

■Stop Mode....................... ...... ....................... ...... ...... 7-19

■Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics. ...... ....................... 7-25

■Adjustment of Frequency Instruction............ ...... ................. .... 7-33

■Limit of Speed(Frequency instruction Limit)....................... ...... .. 7-36

■Improve Operating Performance....................... ...... ................. 7-37

■Mechanics Protection....................... ...... ................. .. ...... 7-40

■Speed Search.. ........ .. ........ .. ........ .. ........ .. ........ .. ... 7-46

■Drive Protection...................... ...... ................. .. .. ..... ... 7-49 ■Function of Input Terminals............ ...... ................. .. .. ..... 7-50

Page 4: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

■Monitoring............ ...... ................. .. .. ..... .......... .. .... 7-56

■Spical function.. ................. .. .. ..... .......... .. .... ... ..... 7-60

■Function of digital operator. ................. .. .. ..... .......... .. .... 7-66

■PG signal detection. ................. .. .. ..... .......... .. .... ... .... 7-71

■Supplement. ................. .. .. ..... .......... .. .... ... ..... . ... . 7-75

8. Maintaining·Checking.

■ Maintaining·Checking.... .......... .. .... ... .... .......... .. .... ... ..8-1

9.Specification

■Specification.... .......... .. .... ... .... .......... .. .... ... .... ......9-1

■Specification of Options·peripherals.... .......... .. .... ... .... ..........9-5

10. Appendix

■Control Mode of L380 .. .......... .. .... ... .... ......... .. .......... .. 10-1 ■Cautions of Using Drive.. .......... .. .... ... .... ......... .. .......... ..10-4 ■Cautions of Using the Motor.. .......... .. .... ... .... ......... .. .........10-7 ■Examples of Interconnection.. .......... .. .... ... .... ......... .. .........10-9 ■Parameter Setting Table.. .......... .. .... ... .... ......... .. .......... ..10-17

Page 5: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Using

1-0

Using

This chapter explains the confirming items of received drive.

■Introduction of L380......................................1-1

■Receiving Confirmation....................................1-2

■Overall Dimension and Install Dimension...................1-4

■Confirming and Managing the Install Site..................1-5

■Installing Direction and Space............................1-6

1

Page 6: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Using

1-1

■ Introduction of L380

Types of L380 The power supply class of L380 series drives is 400V. The suitable motor capacity is 1.5-55KW (10 types in

total).

Table1.1 400V class capacity specification

Type SP-L380-□ 45P5 47P5 4011 4015 4018 4022 4030 4037 4045 4055

Drive Capacity Code 45P5 47P5 4011 4015 4018 4022 4030 4037 4045 4055

Maximal Motor Power for

Application (KW) 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55

Output Power(KVA) 11 14 21 26 31 37 50 61 74 98

Rated Output Current(A 14 18 27 34 41 48 65 80 97 128

(W) 1600 2500 3000 4000 5000 6000 9000 12800 16000 20000Selection of

Braking Resistance 60 60 45 30 30 20 15 13.6 11 9

The Least Resistance (Ω)

43 43 43 30 30 15 11 10 10 7

Rated voltage 3phase 350、380、400、420V 50/60Hz

Voltage changes +10%,-15% power

frequency ±5%

Selection of Breaker(A) 20 30 50 60 75 100 100 150 150 200

Selection of Contactor(A) 20 20 30 50 50 50 80 100 100 160

(A) 15 20 30 40 50 80 100 120 160 180 Selection of Filter

(mH) 1.42 1.06 0.7 0.53 0.42 0.26 0.24 0.18 0.16 0.12

Note:* means the data is not commonly used. Contact the factory if you need the data.

Page 7: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Using

1-2

■ Receiving Confirmation

Confirming Please check the following items when received goods.

Table1.2 Confirming

Confirming Items Confirming Instructions

Different from what you ordered? Confirm the side name plate “MODEL”

Somewhere damaged?

Check the general appearance to see if it is

damaged during transportation

Loose of fastened part such as screw? Check with screwdriver when necessary.

Nameplate information There is a nameplate attached to the side of each Inverter.The nameplate shows the model

number.specifications,lot number,serial number,and toher information on the Inverter.

Example Nameplate

The following nameplate is an examplate for a standard model SP-GF3-4011D1: MODEL: Model of drive INPUT: Power supply OUTPUT: Drive output SER NO: Code of drive MASS: Weight

图 1.1 nameplate

Page 8: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Using

1-3

■ Explanation of Drive Model

In the column of MODEL of the name plate, the series number, voltage scale, maximum motor capacitor

and retrofit marks are indicated with the figures and letters.

Diagram1.2 designation code of inverter

Name of Drive Parts Picture 1.3 indicates the overall appearance and name of parts.

(5.5—18.5KW)

Picture 1.3 Overall Appearance of the Drive

Page 9: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Using

1-4

■ Overall Dimension and Install Dimension

The following is the overall dimension of the drive

((5.5—18.5KW))

Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight (kg) of the drive

Diagram1.4 Overall Dimension of the Drive(22—55KW)

Note:* means the data is not commonly used. Contact the factory if you need the data.

Type SP-L380-□ 4022 4030 4037 4045 4055

W 260 260 380 380 380

H 328 328 495 495 600

D 179 179 250 250 250

W1 188 188 325 325 325

Overall

install

(mm)

H1 311 311 480 480 585

wight(kg) 23 23 32 32 *

H1H

W

W1

D

Page 10: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Using

1-5

■ Confirming and Managing the Install Site

Install the drive in the following environment and keep the most suitable condition.

Install Site Please install the drive under the following condition:

Environment temperature: -10~40℃

Environment humidity: 90%RH (no dewing) ·Do not install the drive where the metal powder, oil and water are easy to get inside. ·Do not install the drive where has inflammable materials such as wood. ·Do not install the drive where the sunlight is direct.

·Install the drive in clean environment where no oil mist and dust or in the enclosure where suspended ·matter can be screened. ·Install the drive where there is no radioactive matter. ·Install the drive where there is no harmful gas or liquid. ·Install the drive where the vibration is slight. ·Install the drive where the saline matter is little.

Environment Temperature Management

Install the drive where temperature is stable to ensure the reliability. Install cooling fan or cooling air conditioner to keep the temperature below 45℃ when the drive is installed in the enclosure.

Stop Foreign Material from Falling into the Drive during

Operation

During the installing, cover the dustproof shield to avoid the falling of the drilling dust and remnant metal into inside. When the installing is completed, remove the dustproof shield to keep good ventilation and heat dissipation of the drive.

Page 11: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Using

1-6

■ Installing Direction and Space

To ensure the cooling effect of the drive, please be sure to install vertically and ensure certain space according to

the picture1.6.

Figure1.5 Installing direction and space of the drive

Page 12: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Wiring Connection

This chapter indicates the wiring connection of terminals and main loop, the wire connecting specifications of main loop, control loop and its connection specifications.

■Connect the Peripherals....................................2-1

■Wiring Interconnection.....................................2-2

■Composition of Terminal Platform...........................2-4

■Terminal Wiring Connection of Main Loop....................2-5

■Explanation of Control Loop Terminals.....................2-13

■Check the cabling.........................................2-17

■Mounting and Cabling of Expanding Card....................2-18

2

Page 13: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Wiring connection

2-1

■Connect the Peripherals

Figure 2.1 shows the standard drive connection example with peripherals.

POWER

Connecting circuit breaker or leakage switch

Electromagnetic contactor (MC)

Input side anti - interference filter

Improving power (AC) AC reactor

Improving power factorDC reactor (DC)

Brake resistor

Output sideNoise filter

MOTOR

Driver

Page 14: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Wiring connection

2-2

■ Wiring Interconnection

Please connect wires according to Figure 2.2. By the use of digital manipulator, motor can be started as long as the main loop is connected.

Figure 2.2 Wiring Interconnection

1. The maximal output capacity of +V voltage of control loop output terminal is 20mA.

2. Set the parameter L4.12=0(ineffectiveness of the stall preventing function) of the

deceleration during the use of braking resistor. If not change of setting, the motor

sometimes are not going to stop in the set deceleration time. importance

Page 15: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Wiring connection

2-3

3.Teminal◎stands for the main loop, ○ stands for the control loop.

4. self cooling motor, Wire connection for cooling fan is not needed.

5. PG loop needs no connection with PG card in open loop control.

6. Input signal terminals of sequence control(X1-X8) indicated in the diagram is

no-voltage contact or connected by sequence control of NPN transistor (or common

point/common emitter mode).(factory setting)

7. Mutiple function comparing output is special purposed output for frequency compare

table, current table, voltage table, power table and so on. It cannot be used in other

control systems such as feedback control system.

8.DC reactor used for improving input power (no need for installation)is embedded in the

400V class 18.5~110KW drive. Below 15kW drives, it is external choice.

Page 16: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Wiring connection

2-4

■ Composition of Terminal Platform

Figure 2.3 indicates the terminal array of the drive.

Note: Every corresponding terminal function explanation invites "the explanation consulting seal

controlling circuit terminal explanation " and "PG terminal". Communication card explanation asks consult whose corresponding specifications.

main loop terminals:

Figure 2.3 terminal array of the drive

Page 17: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Wiring connection

2-5

■Terminal Wiring Connection of Main Loop

Connection of main loop terminal

Composition of Main Loop

Table2.1 indicates the composition of the drive’s main loop

L380-5P5*~L380-018*

3-phase power

compare voltage and switch

compare inspect operate PC

position velocity operation

drive power

port power

mainboard +5V

electricity check

output

pulse input

velocity torsion input

port input/output

CN2

motor

current protect

switch

relay drive

voltage check

IPM module

CN3

brake resistance

rake resistance protect check

charge resistance protect check

L380-022~L380-045

CN2

CN3

3-phase power

brake resistance

motor

switch

position velocity operation

compare inspect operate PC

compare voltage and switch

drive power

port power

mainboard +5V

output

pulse input

velocity torsion input

port input/output

electricity check

current protectrelay drive

charge resistance protect check

IPM module

voltage check

rake resistance protect check

L380-037A~L380-055A

Page 18: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Wiring connection

2-6

CN2

CN3

3-phase power

brake resistance

motor

switch

position velocity operation

compare inspect operate PC

compare voltage and switch

drive power

port power

mainboard +5V

output

pulse input

velocity torsion input

port input/output

electricity check

current protectrelay drive

charge resistance protect check

IPM module

voltage check

rake resistance protect check

Figure 2.4 Composition of the Drive Main Loop

Page 19: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Wiring connection

2-7

Wiring Connection of Main Loop

Introduce the connection of input side, output side and earth wire of the main loop.

Input Side Connection of Main Loop

Pay attention to the followings in the input side of main loop. Set up the Breaker for Connection

Between the input terminals of power source R,S,T,Be sure to insert MCCB Select MCCB capacity as much as 1.5~2 time of the drive capacity of rated current. The time characteristic of MCCB is related to the overload protection of the drive (1 minute for 150% rated current). When MCCB are connected with multiple drive and other machines, please use sequence controller in

connecting point to cut off the power in malfunction according to Figure 2.6.

Figure 2.5setup of the connecting breaker

Set up the Leakage Current Circuit Breaker

Leakage current of high frequency is generated because of the high frequency impulse wave output. Please select leakage current circuit breaker for drive in wire inputting side. The high frequency leakage current can be eliminated, and the leakage current of high frequency band which is dangerous for people can be tested out. ·leakage current circuit breaker for drive should be selected as the action current 30mA or above

compared with a drive. ·If select common leakage current circuit breaker, please choose as the action current above 200mA

and acting time above 0.1s compared with a drive. Setting Magnetic Contactor

Power source of main loop can be controlled both by the sequence controller and magnetic contactor. But when the magnetic contactor stops the drive in wire inputting side, the regenerative braking will

Page 20: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Wiring connection

2-8

not work and slide to stop. The frequently use of magnetic contactor of coil in side to control the run and stop will cause drive problems. Please select the highest frequency of run/stop as 30 minutes per switch. Recovering from power cut, the magnetic contactor can not auto run when use digital manipulator. When use the braking resistor unit, cut the magnetic contactor of power source side by sequence controller at contact point of unit thermo relay.

Connection of Terminal Platform

The sequence of input power source is not related to the sequence of terminal platforms R, S, T. It can be connected by any terminal.

Set up AC reactance or DC reactance When connecting the huge capacity power transformer (above 600KVA) or switch the coil in electrolysis capacitance,part of the rectifying components can be damaged by the input of huge peak current into power source loop. Under this condition, please install AC reactance (optional), or install DC reactance in DC reactance selection terminal. The installment of the reactance improves the power factor, and eliminates the noise of the drive from power source. It can also decrease the noise from the drive and improve the noise-resistance capability.Set up Surge Absorber

When connect the inductive load around the drive (electromagnetic contactor, electromagnetic relay, electromagnetic valve, electromagnetic coil, magnetic brake, etc), be sure to parallel surge absorber or use with diode, the rated voltage of bypass diode should be higher than loop voltage.

Setting the Noise Filter of Power Side

It can eliminate the noise from power source to drive and decrease the noise from drive to power source.

Correct example of connecting the noise filter of power source side

Figure2.6 Correct Example of Connecting the Noise Filter of Power Source Side

Wrong example of connecting the noise filter of power source side

Page 21: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Wiring connection

2-9

Figure2.7 Wrong Example of Connecting the Noise Filter of Power Source Side

Page 22: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Wiring connection

2-10

Wiring Connection of Output Side of Main Loop Pay attention to the followings when connecting the wire of main loop,

Connect Drive with Motor Please connect output terminals U, V, W with output wire of motor U, V, W. During operation, make sure the motor is co-rotated under co-rotation instruction. If it is reverse rotating, please select every two from U, V, W terminals to exchange.

Do Not Connect Power Source Wire to Output Terminals Don not connect power source wire to the output terminals U, V, W. Adding voltage on output terminals will damage the inside components of the drive.

Do Not Earth Wiring or Short Circuit the Output Terminals Do not touch the output terminals or let output wire contact the cover of the drive. It may cause danger of electric shock or short circuit. Do not short circuits the output wire.

Do Not Use Phase Leading Electrolytic Capacitor or Noise Filter Do not connect phase leading electrolytic capacitor LC/RC or noise filter. The output higher harmonics of the drive will lead to component overheating and even component damage to drives.

Do Not Use Magnetic Connector Switch (MC) As a principle, when MC is set between drive and motor, switching ON/OFF during operation is not allowed. When the drive is working and MC is on, there will be large current into the drive and start the function of over current protection. Setting MC for switching to business used power source, please switch after the stop of drive and motor. Switching during rotation, please select speed search function. Adopting transient power off strategy, please use relayed releasing MC.

Set up and Mount the Thermo Relay In order to prevent overheating of motor, the drive are installed the function of electronic thermal

protection. When a frequency converter is connected with several motors or use multi-polar motor, and set up thermal driven THR between drive and motor, cut off the electromagnetic contactor of main loop by sequence controller at contact point of thermo relay.

Set up Noise Filter in Output Side Connection of noise filter in output side of the drive can reduce the radio and induced interference

Page 23: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Wiring connection

2-11

Figure 2.8 Set up Noise Filter in Output Side

Countermeasures to Restrain Induced Interference

Besides setting up the noise filter, the methods to restrain induced interference are: 1. Connect all wires into earthed metal tube. 2. Keeping 30cm distance from signal wires can reduce the effect of induced interference.

Figure 2.9 strategies of restraining the induced interference.

Restrain radio interference Interference can be arose at input wire, output wire and drive body. It will help to reduce the radio interference by setting up noise filter in both input and output side, and putting the drive body inside the body cover.

Figure 2.10 restrain radio interference

Page 24: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Wiring connection

2-12

The connection distance between drive and motor Leakage current of higher harmonic from electrical wire can be increased when the connecting wire between drive and motor is too long. Besides, increasing the output current of inverter can result in bad effect for machines around. Adjust parameters of carrier frequency according to table 2.1(A2.02). Details refer to Chapter 5 ”parameter table”.

Table2.1 Carrier Frequency Adjustment

Connection Distance Between

Drive and Motor Below 50m Below 100m Over 100m

Carrier Frequency Below 15kHz 10kHz 5kHz

Connection of Earth Wire

Pay attention to the followings during the connection of earth wire

Earth terminal ( ) should be connected to the earth. 400V class: earth type C(earth resistor below 10Ω) The earth wire can not be shared with welding machine and power equipment. The earth wire should comply with the technical standard of electrical equipment and shorten the wire

as possible as you can. Because the drive can produce leakage current, the long distance between earth terminal and earth point can lead to unstable electric potential of earth point of the drive.

Figure 1.11 connection of earth wire

Connect Brake Resistor

400V class 1.5~3.7kW drive need use house mounting brake resistor. Brake resistor is connected according to Figure 2.13. When use brake resistor, make sure you set

L4.12.=0(invalid of stall preventing function during slow down )

Figure 2.12 Brake Resistor Connection

Page 25: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Wiring connection

2-13

■Explanation of Control Loop Terminals

Connection of Analog Signal

Length of control line between remote operation of practical analog signal, analog operator or operating signal and drive is set below 50m. Furthermore, please connect separately with strong electrical loop(main loop and sequence control loop of relay) in order to prevent interference outside from machines around. When you use outside frequency setter to set frequency instead of digital manipulator, as Figure 2.14 indicated, use twisted shielded wire and connect it to terminal G of the drive.

G

Frequency setting adjustment

2KΩ

+V

F2

F2

FC

0V

Frequency setting power+12V 20mA

Multi-function analog input[0 to 10V(20kΩ)/-10 to +10V(20kΩ)/4 to 20mA(250Ω)]

-VFrequency setting power-12V 20mA

1

3

2F1

Figure 2.13 Connection of analog signal

Connection Sequence

Connect wire to terminal platform as the following sequence 1. Use cross screwdriver to loose the screw of terminal. 2. Insert electric wire under the tabletting. 3. Screw down the screws of terminal.

Page 26: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Wiring connection

2-14

Function of Control Loop Terminal Table2.2 indicates the types and functions of terminal marks of control loop. Look up to the table to

select proper terminal for use.

Table 2.2 indicates the types and functions of terminal marks of control loop

Type No Sign Signal name Function explanation of function electrical level

1 Y1 Multifunction PHC output1 Factory setting: Zero speed

2 Y2 Multifunction PHC output2 Factory setting: Runing

3 Y3 Multifunction PHC output3 Factory setting: Invertor ready

4 YC Output common point of

photoelectrical coupler

DC+48V 50mA

5 M3

6 M1

7 M2

multifunction contact point

output(ON contact)

Factory setting: between M1-M2 it is on

during band brake, between M1-M3 it is

off.

Dry contacts

Contact capacity:

1A max at AC250V,

1A max at DC30V

8 MA Malfunction finding(NO

9 MB Output common point of relay

J8

output of

photolectric

coupler

Output of

relay

10 MC

malfunction finding(NC

contact)

Factory setting: between MA-MB it is on

during fault happening, between MB-MC it

is off.

Dry contacts

Contact capacity:

1A max at AC250V,

1A max at DC30V

1 X1

run-stop instruction

of co-rotation ON: co-rotation, OFF: stop

2 X2 run-stop instructions ON: reverse rotation, OFF: stop 3

X3 Multiple function input choice1 Factory setting: ON is multiple stage speed

instruction1

4 X4 Multiple function input choice2

Factory setting: ON is multiple stage speed

instruction2

5 X5 Multiple function input choice3

Factory setting: ON is multiple stage speed

instruction3

6 X6 Multiple function input choice4 Factory setting: ON is Joy frequency 7 X7 Multiple function input choice5 Factory setting: ON is malfunction resetting 8 X8 Multiple function input choice6 Factory setting: ON is basic electrode

DC+24V 8mA 电源

J9

input signal

of sequence

control

9 P- 0V +24V power supply reference common DC+24V 8mA-GND

1 FM

Multifunction analog value

monitoring 1

2 AM Multifunction analog value

monitoring 2

Factory setting: output frequency 0~

+10V/100% frequency

Factory setting: output current

5V/rating current of drive

DC 0~+10V±5%

2mA max

3 V+ Power output +12V +12v power source for Analog instruction +12V 20mA max 4 V- Power output -12V -12v power source for Analog instruction -12V 20mA max 5 F1 Analog value input terminal 1 0~+10V/100% 0~+10V,4~20mA

6 F2 Analog value input terminal 2 -10~+10V/-100%~+100%

7 F3 Analog value input terminal 3 -10~+10V/-100%~+100%

-10~+10V

4~20mA

TM4

analog value

of in/output

signal

8 FC Analog common contact point 0V 0V

1 FA A phase pulse output

2 FB B phase pulse output

OC gate output the highest response frequency

30kHz

J4

Pulse monitor

output 3 FG pulse output common point Frequency dividing pulse output common

Page 27: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Wiring connection

2-15

*1.when coil of drive relay equals to reactance load, make sure to insert bypass diode as Figure 2.15. *2. the specification of impulse input are indicated as following table.

Figure 2.14 connection of bypass diode

Common Emitter mode/Common Collector Mode

When using CN6 (separated way combination hub), you are able to switch common emitter mode (0V common point)/common collector mode(+24V common point). Furthermore, complying with outside+24V power source improved the degree of freedom of input signal method.

Table 2.3Common emitter mode, common collector mode and signal input

Corresponding internal power source External power source

Com

mon collecting electrode m

ode

X1

X2

INP

P++24V 80mA

P-NPN set

X1

X2

INP

P++24V 80mA

P-

NPN set

Com

mon em

itter mode

X1

X2

INP

P++24V 80mA

P-PNP set

X1

X2

INP

P++24V 80mA

P-

PNP set

Low electrical level 0.0~0.8V

Low electrical level 3.5~13.2V

H duty ratio 30~70%

Pulse frequency 0~32kHz

Page 28: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Wiring connection

2-16

Cautions of Control Loop Connecting Pay attention to the followings during the connection of control loop. The control loop wires should be separated with other power line and electric lines of force. Terminals MA、MB、MC、M1、M2 of the control loop should be separated with other control loop

terminals. Preventing the false action caused by interference (noise), Please using shielded line or twisted

shielded wire. The end of the line should be dealt according to Figure 2.17; the length should be less than 50m.

Connect shielded line to G terminal. Leave shielded line away with other signal line and equipment, use adhesive belt to keep insulation.

Figure 2.16 end dealing of twisted shielded line

Page 29: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Wiring connection

2-17

■ Check the cabling

Check

After the connection, please be sure to check the inter cabling. At this time you do not have to use the tools to check the control loop connection. The followings are the checking item. Is the connection right? Do the dusts of the wire and the screws fall into the drive? Do the screws loose? Are the naked wires of the terminals connected to other terminals?

Page 30: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Wiring connection

2-18

■Mounting and Cabling of Expanding Card Specialized function can be reached through expanding card. Diagram2.5 indicated the type and specification of t expanding card.

Table 2.5 type and specification of expanding card.

Type Name function

FU-04

A, B, Z phase pulse(differential pulse input), highest frequency

is 250kHz,A, B phase pulse monitor output(PG power source output

+5V,biggest current 200mA), related line drive.

FU-05

SIN、COS phase pulse(differential pulse input), highest frequency

is 250kHz,A, B phase pulse monitor output(PG power source output

+5V,+24V,biggest current 200mA), related line drive.

FU-07

A, B, Z phase pulse(differential pulse input), highest frequency

is 250kHz,A, B phase pulse monitor output(PG power source output

+12V,biggest current 200mA), related pull-push electrical level

and OC gate drive.

PG speed

control card

FU-08

A, B, Z phase pulse(differential pulse input), highest frequency

is 250kHz, pulse input of PLUS, SIGN, CLR phase instruction

control (PG power source output +5V,+12V,biggest current 200mA),

related line drive.

Note: you can select proper pulse output mode (A/B pulse, PLUS/SIGN pulse or CW/CCW pulse) through

parameter setting H5.04.

Page 31: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Wiring connection

2-19

Mounting Before mount the expanding card, make sure that the indicating lamp of charge inside the drive is off, and the front cover is removed. Look up to the expanding card manuals to get the mounting details.

Prevent the Expanding Card from Floating up

After mounting the expanding card, please make sure the expanding card are fastened in case of the card floating up. The card can be take out by kneading tight of the claspers. When mount the card, please make sure the separating stick has been fixed on the main board, or the card will not be mounted and the function will not work.

Terminal and Specification of PG Speed Control Card The following indicates specifications of PG speed control in different control mode.

FU-04 Expanding Card Terminal specifications of FU-04 expanding card

Table2.6 Terminal and its specifications of FU-04I expanding card Terminal NO. Content Specification

1 phase A pulse monitor output FA

2 phase B pulse monitor output FB

The highest reacting frequency of Linear drive

input(RS422 electrical input) is 30KHz

3 Frequency dividing pulse output

common contact FG DC 0V(use big GND for power source)

J4

E Connection terminals of shield line common contactor of pulse monitor output

1 Pulse generator used power source DC+5V(±5%),Maximum 200mA

2 Phase A pulse input(+)

3 Phase B pulse input(+)

4 Phase Z pulse input(+)

5 Phase U pulse input(+)

6 Phase V pulse input(+)

7 Phase W pulse input(+)

The highest reacting frequency of linear drive input(RS422

electrical level input) is 300kHz

8 NC hang-up

9 Power source for Pulse generator DC 0V(use big GND for power source)

10 phase A pulse output(-)

11 phase B pulse output(-)

12 phase Z pulse output(-)

13 phase U pulse output(-)

14 phase V pulse output(-)

TM2

15 phase W pulse output(-)

The highest reacting frequency of Linear drive

input(RS422 electrical input) is 300kHz

Page 32: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Wiring connection

2-20

FU-05 Expanding Card Terminal specifications of FU-05 expanding card

Table 2.7 Terminal specifications of FU-05D expanding card Terminals NO. content specification

3 SIN-

4 COS-

Rectify import , maximal response frequency of

cosine wave 300 kHz

5 REF- Drive signal

8 SIN+

9 COS+

Rectify import , maximal response frequency of

cosine wave 300 kHz

10 REF+ Drive signal

TM2

14 0V Rectify corresponding OV of cosine institute GND

1 Power source SG for Pulse generator DC 0V(Corresponding DC5V)

2 phase Z pulse monitor output FC-

3 phase B pulse monitor output FB-

4 phase A pulse monitor output FA-

Open circuit collector output DC5V, maximum 30mA

5 NC hang-up

6 Power source TG for Pulse generator DC 0V(Corresponding DC24V)

7 Power source for Pulse generator PL2 DC+24V(2)

8 The pulse zero clearing signal imports (CLR-)

9 Gating pulse imports (SIGN-)

10 Gating pulse imports (PLUS-)

The highest reacting frequency of Linear drive

input(RS422 electrical input) is 30kHz

(Entering pattern:A+B、SIGN+PLUS、CCW+CW)

11 Pulse places Z under surveillance each other OC output

12 phase Z pulse monitor output FC+

13 phase B pulse monitor output FB+

14 phase A pulse monitor output FA+

Open circuit collector output DC5V, maximum 30mA

15 NC hang-up

16 Power source for Pulse generator PL3 DC+24V(3)

17 Power source for Pulse generator PL1 DC+24V(1)

18 The pulse zero clearing signal imports (CLR +)

19 Gating pulse imports (SIGN +)

TM1

20 Gating pulse imports (PLUS +)

The highest reacting frequency of Linear drive

input(RS422 electrical input) is 30kHz

(Entering pattern:A+B、SIGN+PLUS、CCW+CW)

Figure 2.17 20 injection attachment plug stitch sketch maps

Page 33: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Wiring connection

2-21

FU-07 Expanding Card Terminal specifications of FU-07

Table2.8 FU-07G expanding card terminals and its specifications

Terminal NO. Content specification

ES DC+12V(±5%),Maximum 80mA

EG

Power source for Pulse

generator DC 0V(use big GND for power source)

A+ Phase A pulse input(+)

A- Phase A pulse input(-)

B+ Phase B pulse input(+)

TM1

B- Phase B pulse input(-)

The highest reacting frequency of Linear drive

input(RS422 electrical input) is 30kHz

FG

common contactor of

Frequency dividing

pulse output DC 0V(use big GND for power source)

FA Frequency dividing

pulse output(FA)

J4

FB Frequency dividing

pulse output(FB)

The highest reacting frequency of Linear drive

input(RS422 electrical input) is 30KHz

Page 34: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Wiring connection

2-22

FU-08ExpandingCard Terminal specifications of FU-08D expanding card

Table2.9 Terminal specifications of FU-08D expanding card

Terminals NO. content specification

1 Power source for Pulse generator DC+5V(±5%),maximum200mA

2 phase A pulse output(+)

3 phase B pulse output(+)

4 phase Z pulse output(+)

5 phase U pulse output(+)

6 phase V pulse output(+)

7 phase W pulse output(+)

The highest reacting frequency of Linear drive

input(RS422 electrical input) is 300kHz

8 NC hang-up

9 Power source for Pulse generator DC 0V(use big GND for power source)

10 phase A pulse output(-)

11 phase B pulse output(-)

12 phase Z pulse output(-)

13 phase U pulse output(-)

14 phase A pulse output(-)

TM1

15 phase A pulse output(-)

The highest reacting frequency of Linear drive

input(RS422 electrical input) is 300kHz

1 Power source SG for Pulse generator DC 0V (to DC5V)

2 phase Z pulse monitor output FZ+

3 phase B pulse monitor output FB+

4 phase A pulse monitor output FA+

Open circuit collector output DC24V, maximum

30mA

5 NC hang-up

6 Power source TG for Pulse generator DC 0V (to DC12V)

7 Power source PL2 for Pulse generator DC12V(2)

8 Pulse input correction signal CLR-

9 Pulse input signal CLR-

10 Pulse input signal PULS-

Look up to the manual of FU-08B

11 Phrase Z pulse monitor O OC gate output

12 phase Z pulse monitor output FZ-

13 phase B pulse monitor output FB-

14 phase A pulse monitor output FA-

Open circuit collector output DC24V, maximum

30mA

15 NC hang-up

16 Power source PL3 for Pulse generator DC12V(3)

17 Power source PL1 for Pulse generator DC12V(1)

18 Pulse input correction signal CLR+

19 Pulse input signal SIGN+

TM2

20 Pulse input signal PULS+

Look up to the manual of FU-08B

Page 35: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Wiring connection

2-23

End circuit

End circuit diagram example shown for every expansion calorie by the following

Coder pulse couples back entering and their frequency division output end

Include: FU-04 * expands card TM2 , TM1 holds the mouth , FU-08 * card TM2 , TM1 (2 , 3 , 4 , 12 , 13 , 14 foot) holds a mouth. Whose end circuit diagram pursues what be shown as follows:

A+

A-

Vcc

GND

GND

FA-

FA+Division

rate circuit

Figure 2.18 :I/O Circuit Configuration of FU-04 and FU-08

Include: FU-05 * card TM2 , TM1 (2 , 3 , 4 , 12 , 13 , 14 foot) end. Whose end circuit diagram pursues what be shown as follows:

GND

FA-

FA+

SIN+

SIN-

Division rate

circuit

the sine and

cosine signal

receiver

Figure 2.29 : I/O Circuit Configuration of FU-05

Include: FU-07 * expansion calorie TM1 end Whose end circuit diagram pursues what be shown as follows:

Vcc

FA

FG

A+

A-

Vcc

GND

Division rate

circuit

Figure 2.20 : I/O Circuit Configuration of FU-07

Page 36: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Wiring connection

2-24

Wire Connection The followings are the connection example of different expanding cards.

Connection of FU-04 Expanding Card

The following shows connection of FU-04 expanding card

IM

Three phase ACdrive

Phase Z monitoring output

Phase B monitoring output

Encoder pulse input

PG

TM1

1234

TM2

E

Phase A monitoring output

56

FU-04*

A+

Z-

Z+B-

A-B+

E

Please use twisted shield wire as signal wire.

Do not use other PG power sources except PG(coder), Other power source will lead to fault action because of

interference.

Set the connection length below 100m

The rotary direction can be set according to parameter H5.03.The initial value is that phase A is leading during the

rotary of motor,

Figure 2.21 FU-04 connection of expanding card

Page 37: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Wiring connection

2-25

Connection of FU-05 Expanding Card

IM

driveEncoder pulse

input

PG

TM1

TM2

E

control pulse input

Electric motor coder pulse couples back output

FU-05*脉冲信号发生器

Three phase AC

Please use twisted shield wire as signal wire.

Do not use other PG power sources except PG(coder), Other power source will lead to fault action because of

interference.

Set the connection length below 100m

The rotary direction can be set according to parameter H5.03 (set the phase sequence of PG).The initial value is

that phase A is leading during the rotary of motor.

Figure 2.22 FU-05 connection of expanding card

Connection of FU-07 Expanding Card

The following shows connection of FU-07 expanding card

IM

Three phase AC drive

Phase B monitoring output

Encoder pulse input

PG

TM1

Phase A monitoring output

GND12V

CN206

ESEG

A+A-

B+B-

FGFAFB

GND12V

E

FU-07*

CN2

Page 38: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Wiring connection

2-26

Please use twisted shield wire as signal wire.

Do not use other PG power sources except PG(coder), Other power source will lead to fault action because of

interference.

Set the connection length below 100m

The rotary direction can be set according to parameter H5.03 (set the phase sequence of PG).The initial value is

that phase A is leading during the rotary of motor.

Figure 2.23 FU-07 connection of expanding card

Connection of FU-08D Expanding Card

The following shows connection of FU-08D expanding card

IM

Three phase

drive Encoder

PG

TM1

TM2

E

control pulse input

Electric motor coder pulse couples back output

FU-08*

Pulse

generator

Please use twisted shield wire as signal wire.

Do not use other PG power sources except PG(coder), Other power source will lead to fault action because of

interference.

Set the connection length below 100m

The rotary direction can be set according to parameter H5.03 (set the phase sequence of PG).The initial value is that

phase A is leading during the rotary of motor.

Figure 2.24 FU-08 connection of expanding card

Page 39: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Wiring connection

2-27

Wiring Connection Sequence and Cautions of Terminal Platform (Refer to CH10) Connect wire of platform as the following sequences.

1. Use screwdriver to loose the terminal screws. 2. Insert power source on the perform in the connecting hole of terminal platform. 3. screw up the screws.

Pay attention to the Followings in Wiring Connection

The control signal wire of PG control card should be connected separately with other power wires and electrical wires.

Use twisted pair shield wire to connect PG. Deal with the tail of the shield wire to prevent interference. Limit the wire below 100m, the dealing of the tail is showed in Figure 2.17

Shield wire should be connected to terminal G or the cover of motor. Don not deal with the wire tail by stannum, or it will cause contacting problem. The shelled terminal of the wire are about 5.5mm

Selection of pulse number of PG(Encoder) The power source of FU-04I、FU-05D、FU-08D are 5V power source. The power source of FU-07G are 12V power source. Please connect after checking the power specifications of PG(coder). The checked highest output pulse of PG is 250 KHz. The output frequency Fpg can be reached by the following formula:

When the power source capacity of PG (coder) are more than 200mA, please prepare separately the power source. Equipping the electro capacitor can be adopted when the power off handling is needed.

Figure 2.25 The wiring of electrolytic capacitor (the example of FU-04)

Page 40: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Summery of Digital

Manipulator and Parameter Group

This chapter indicates the display and function of digital manipulator, as well as the summery of the parameter

group and its switching method.

■Digital Manipulator........................................3-1

■Summery of the Parameter Group.............................3-3

3

Page 41: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Summery of Digital Manipulator and Parameter Group

3-1

importance

■ Digital Manipulator

This chapter indicates the display and function of digital manipulator.

Display Introduction of Digital Unit Operator Parts.

The following Figure shows the name and function of the digital manipulator keys.

Figure3.1 name and function of digital unit operator parts

When in the screen of parameter and monitoring, the flickering dot in the right

corner indicates the parameter is being modified.

When in the screen of parameter setting, the flickering indicates the being modified

number.

The light giving FWD when being rotating instruction is bright. When giving reverse

turn instruction, the REV light is bright . When adopting the base electrode blockage state in running

process, FWD and REV two small cups light will glimmer with 2.5 Hz frequency.

Page 42: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Summery of Digital Manipulator and Parameter Group

3-2

Operation Key Explanation of Digital Unit Operator Table3.1 indicates the name and function of the digital manipulator key

Table 3.1 function of operation key

key name function

add

Press the key when choosing parameter code and modifying (add) set values.(the set

value is circling )

reduce

Press the key when choosing parameter code and modifying (reduce) set values. (the set

value is circling )

Right shifting Choose parameter code and digit of the value

ENTER enter Make sure the parameter are in the menu

ESC Menu/escape Select the parameter group and escape from last state

LO/RE inching button

Press this key, the drive is running ,modify operating speed across the operator

interface, and press the key” ”or” ”,then the drive will operator forward or reverse as the set speed

RUN run When the manipulator operating press this key to let the drive run ,the LED on this key

light

STOP stop

When the manipulator operating press this key to stop drive ,the LED on this key light;

When the LED on the key RUN and STOP are not light, the drive is not ready, press

this key to make the drive ready

The indicator light of the operator's keys "RUN "and “STOP" top left corner has the operating state of

green light, red light, flickering red light and light off.

“STOP" has light when drive is ready, “RUN" has light during the operation, “STOP" has

flickering red light when the drive is slowing down to stop, “RUN" and “STOP" has no light on when

drive are unready.

Figure3.2 indicator light of “run ”and “stop” key and its display

Page 43: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Summery of Digital Manipulator and Parameter Group

3-3

■ Summery of Parameter group

This section explains the group of drive parameter and the switch between groups.

Parameter Group There are four common parameter groups(B-O belongs to the same group) and a group of special

parameter(read the parameter). Through setting the parameter, the reference, setup and monitor of the

parameter can be realized easily. Figure3.2 indicated the group and main content of the parameter.

Figure3.2 the group and main content of the parameter

group name main content

Commonly used monitoring

Can easily monitor three parameters simultaneously, are corresponded to the 1,2,3 item of

U monitor parameter Can monitor the state, terminal and the malfunction record

A system operating

parameter Can operating the access , encrypt, selflearning and initiating

B application parameter Can set the operating mode, speed search, special running mode selection

C time sequence of curve

parameter Can set the acceleration and deceleration time, corner time, running time and so on

D frequency instruction

parameter Can set the frequency instructions, relation of frequency instruction and jump frequency

E motor parameter

Can set the environment parameter, motor parameter, V/F characteristic parameter, ASR

characteristic parameter, force moment compensating parameter

F special running mode Can set the wobble frequency mode, simple PLC mode, positioning mode and so on

H outside terminal function

parameter

Can set multifunctional contactor input(output)parameter, analog value

input(output)parameter

J outside terminal assistant

setup parameter

Can set the frequency checking, force moment compensating, timer, main axis positioning,

and rigid tapping.

L protecting function

parameter

Can set the overload protection, drive overheating protection, over force moment protection,

speed protection, phase missing protection

Page 44: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Summery of Digital Manipulator and Parameter Group

3-4

importance

Switch of Parameter Group

After the start of the drive, you can enter directly to parameter (monitor) selection. PressMENUESC

continuously to realize the switch between all kinds of common parameter group.

Press enter to reach the parameter setting page from parameter (monitor) choosing page.

Figure 3.3 switching between parameter groups

The drive will automatically enter into commonly used monitoring.

Page 45: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Summery of Digital Manipulator and Parameter Group

3-5

Commonly used Monitoring Items

The commonly used monitoring items can revise its configuration to monitor three items 1, 2, 3 in the

according to the monitoring code.

Operation Examples

The followings are the operation examples for commonly used monitoring item.

Common monitoring item 1(factory setting target frequency)

Common monitoring item 2(factory setting output frequency)

Common monitoring item 3(factory setting output current)

0.00

0.00

0.00

0.00

0.00

0.00

Figure3.4 operation of commonly used monitoring item

Note: when choose frequency instruct as operator (B1.02.=0), the commonly used item 1 are fixed as target frequency, The

commonly used item 1 (target frequency) can be revised by pressing “ENTER".

Figure3.5 modification target frequency handlesParameter Monitoring

Page 46: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Summery of Digital Manipulator and Parameter Group

3-6

During the parameter monitoring, the frequency instruct, output frequency, output

current, output voltage, and malfunction content and recording can be monitored and

displayed.

■ Operation Example

The following shows the example of parameter monitoring

Figure3.6 operation of parameter monitoring

Page 47: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Summery of Digital Manipulator and Parameter Group

3-7

System Operation the parameter operation can ensure the access of the password, the selflearning of the motor and the

initialization of parameter.

Parameter Access of Password (OP1)

By modifying the A1 from 0000 to other value and set the drive into password state; the access of system

parameter is invalid to prevent the system parameter from incorrect modifying.

Note: password state: the drive password is set effectively; the system cannot enter the modifying state.

Unlock state: the drive password is set effectively, and the unlock operation are valid. The system

parameter can enter modifying state, but password is still effective.

Password-free state: the drive password is not set or effective unlock operation has been

processed. The system parameter can be modified and password is invalid.

The following example is for password setting. The drive can be coded by entering password or under the condition of no password.

Figure3.7 coded operation

Page 48: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Summery of Digital Manipulator and Parameter Group

3-8

The following shows the example of unlocking/decrypting

Enter the correct password under the coded condition, the drive is in the unlock state:

Entering password 0000 can decrypt the drive when it is unlocked:

Figure3.8 unlocking/decrypting operation

Self-learning(OP3)

When the control mode of the motor adopts speed sensorless vector control, please carry out self-learning of

the motor parameter to get better control parameters and improve the lift control performance.

When the PMSM is used, please carry out position self-learning of magnetic pole to get the straying angle

(H5.07) of coders. This parameter can also be set up manually.

Note1: please set up the parameters of motor name plate (motor power, number of poles, rating current, voltage,

frequency, rotary speed of rating motor) and the coder's pulse number(H5.01).

Note2: Carrying out static self-learning of the motor with load. Or the correct motor

parameter will received and there is danger while malfunction.

Note3: Do not touch the motor during the period of motor parameter self-learning.

The four way of motor parameter self-learning Press “enter" when OP3=0": stator resistance self-learning(static self-learning)

Press “enter" when OP3=1": stator resistance and motor leakage resistor self-learning(static

self-learning)

Page 49: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Summery of Digital Manipulator and Parameter Group

3-9

Press “enter" when OP3=2": stator resistance, motor leakage resistor and load free current-self

learning(rotary self-learning)

Press “enter" when OP3=3": position of PMSM's magnetic poles (the coder deviated from

electrical angle) self-learning(rotary self-learning)

Press “enter" whenOP3=4": position of PMSM’s magnetic poles (the coder deviated from

electrical angle) self-learning(static self-learning)

The following examples indicates the operation of self-learning

Figure3.9 self-learning operation

The settings of self-learning materials will adapt to the setting of the control model automatically.

Refer to chapter 7 “electric machine self-learning" while the malfunction

The whole parameters can be looked up and set in the system parameter.

All detailed parameter, look up the chapter 5"parameter table". importance

Page 50: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Summery of Digital Manipulator and Parameter Group

3-10

Operation Example

The followings are the example of system parameter operating.

Figure3.10 The operation of system parameter

Parameter Set Communication In parameter set communication, the communication between parameter set and mainboard for transferring

can be realized by operator. It also can realize the direct communication between operator and PC, and the

parameter batch processing.

Operation Examples The followings are the examples of parameter set communication.

Copy parameter

Notice: please press and when want to exit.

Paint parameter

Alarm when painting parameter

+

Figure3.11 operation of parameter set communication

Page 51: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Summery of Digital Manipulator and Parameter Group

3-11

The malfunction give an alarm is demonstrated When malfunction give an alarm appearing on drive, operation face ply is able to demonstrate the malfunction code;While some malfunction codes contain auxiliary information, handle the evasive face ply meeting malfunction code and auxiliary information.

Malfunction code

Malfunction auxiliary information

Figure3.10 The malfunction give an alarm is demonstrated

Page 52: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Parameter Tables This chapter introduced all parameters of drive setting.

■Reference Instruction.....................................4-1

■Group of Parameters.......................................4-2

■Parameter Tables..........................................4-3

■Code of Multifunctional Terminal..........................4-43

4

Page 53: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Parameter Tables

4-1

■Reference Instruction The reference instruction of the parameter tables.

Content and Explanations of Parameter tables. The parameter table is made up by the following contents. Take operation instruction(B1.01) as example:

Control Mode

Parameter

NO.

Name

content

Range

set

Factory

setting

Storage

methord

V/FSensor

Less

vector

non-synchronous

vector with PG

non-synch

ronous

magnetic

flux with

PG

Synchronous

vector with

PG

Synchronous

magnetic

flux with

PG

Reference

page

B1.01.

Operation

instruction

select

set the input method

of operation instruct

0: operator

1:out terminal control

0~1 1 ☆ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎

Parameter NO.: the number of parameters Name: the name of parameters Content: parameter functions and configuration value content Setting range: the setting range of parameters Factory setting: the setup value of factory configuration(every drive type has corresponding factory

setting, the original value please refer to P5-46) Storage method: there are three storage methods according to the modifying state of parameters

◎: can be modified under any condition.

○: Can be modified when drive stops, can not be modified when drive is running. ☆: Can be modified when drive stops, can not be modified when drive is running. After

the modification, the drive will be in unready state. Press RUN to get into ready

state then continues the running.

Control mode: indicated whether the parameter has influence with the control mode. ◎ : must be set up accurately. Please set up the parameter as the

corresponding value to system, or the system will not work normally. ○: certain influence. The parameter will influence the control performance and operation

state in a certain degree, but the not ideal setup will not influence the normal operation of motor.

×: no influence. In this mode, no matter what the parameter setting is, the system will not be influenced.

Reference page: indicate the details and page of the parameter.

Page 54: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Parameter Tables

4-2

■Group of Parameters

The following indicates the drive’s group of parameters

Function of Key

Speed Protection

Over Torque Protection

Overheating Protection of Drive

M otor O verload Protection

Tim er

Frequency D etection

Analog O utput

analog quality input

M ultifunctional connector output

M ultifunctional Connector Input

ASR Characteristics

M otor Param eter

V/F Characteristic

Frequency Instruction relationship

Frequency instruction

Running Tim e Sequence

Accelerating and D ecelerating Corner T im e

accelerating and decelerating tim e

Running M ode

Current M alfunction Info Recording

M alfunction Record

Term inal M onitoring

State M onitoringU1.

U2.

U3.

U4.

B1.

C1.

C2.

C3.

D1.

D2.

E1.

E2.

E5.

H 1.

H 2.

H 3.

H 4.

J1.

J3.

L1.

L2.

L3.

L4.

O 1.O

L

J

H

E

D

C

B

U

system operation param etersO P.O P

system param eters

system operation param eters

M onitoring Param eter

Com m only U sed M onitoring Itemm enu

Selection of Com m only Used M onitoring Item sO 2.

Speed SearchB2.

Jum p FrequencyD3.

Pulse controlH 6.

H 7. M EM O BUS Com m unication

H 8. CAN

Phase M issing ProtectionL6.

Torque com pensationE6.

Encoder Input/outputH 5.

Torque Com pensationJ2.

Positioning of Principal A xisJ4.

PG ProtectionL5.

Expanding function

Drive control circum stance

Drive hardw are environm entA1.

A2.

A3.

A

M otor Param eter 2

V/F Characteristic 2E1.

E2.

Place controlE7.

Page 55: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Parameter Tables

4-3

■Parameter Tables

The following indicates all parameters of the drive.

Commonly Used Monitoring Item In the commonly used monitoring items, 3 parameter monitoring can be carried simply, which are

corresponding to 1,2,3 in

The followings are the initial value of monitoring items. Light

Number Name Content

Minimum

Unit

1 target frequency monitoring and setting of target frequency 0.01Hz 2 output frequency monitoring of output frequency 0.01Hz 3 output current monitoring of output current 0.1A

Note: During the monitoring of the target frequency, pressing enter key can set target frequency, refer to chapter 3:”summery of digital manipulator and parameter group”.

U: Monitoring Parameter In monitoring parameter(U parameter), the parameter such as state, terminal, malfunction record can be monitored.

U1. State Monitoring The followings are state monitoring parameters

Parameter

NO.

Name

Content Minimum

unit

selecting

code

U1.01. target frequency monitor setting of target frequency 0.01Hz 1

U1.02. output frequency monitoring of output frequency 0.01Hz 2

U1.03. feedback frequency monitoring of feedback frequency 0.01Hz 3

U1.04. motor speed monitoring of motor speed 1RPM 4

U1.05. output current monitoring of output current 0.1A 5

U1.06. output torque instruction value monitoring of drive output moment force 0.1% 6

U1.07. output voltage monitoring output voltage 0.1V 7

U1.08. output power monitoring drive output power 0.1KW 8

U1.09. DC voltage of main loop monitoring main loop DC voltage of drive 0.1V 9

U1.10. heatsink temperature monitoring the heasink temperature of the drive 1℃ 10

U1.11. total operation time monitoring total operation time of drive 0H 11

Page 56: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Parameter Tables

4-4

U2 Terminal Monitoring The followings are the terminal monitoring parameter

Parameter

NO

Name

Content Minimum

unit

selecting

code

U2.02. input/output terminal state

Make sure the ON/OFF state of input/output terminal

M1-M2

X1X2X3X4X5X6X7X8

boundary

Input

Output

Y1Y2Z Y3Unused

X9

~ 101

U2.03. F1 input analog value Input analog value of monitoring terminal F1 0.1% 103

U2.04. F2 input analog value Input analog value of monitoring terminal F2 0.1% 104

U2.05. input analog value Input analog value of monitoring terminal F3 0.1% 105

U2.06. input pulse PG/motor angle Monitor corresponding content according to 02.05 setting 1Pls/0.1˚ 106

U2.07. PG pulse deviationed peak Used for evaluate the interference degree to PG signal 1Pls 107

U2.08. regenerative braking duty ratio braking unit ON/OFF duty ratio of drive when carry out

regenerative braking 0% 108

U2.09. UVW state unused 1 109

U2.10. actual positioning deviation 110

U2.11. operation state unused state indication for inverter operating 101

U2.12. ED% unused 102

U2.13. mark current AST state(refer to P6-60) 103

U2.14. type code

U2.15. Data

U2.16. Software editon F3750――mean GF3 series,Software editon is 750

U3 Malfunction Record The following is the parameter fro malfunction record

Parameter

NO. Name Content minimum unit

U3.01. malfunction record 1 the latest malfunction content ~

U3.02. Cumulative operation time during malfunction 1 The latest malfunction cumulative operation time 1H

U3.03. malfunction record 2 the second latest malfunctions content ~

U3.04. Cumulative operation time during malfunction 2 The second latest malfunction cumulative operation time 1H

U3.05. malfunction record 3 the third latest malfunctions content ~

U3.06. Cumulative operation time during malfunction 3 The third latest malfunction cumulative operation time 1H

U3.07. malfunction record 4 the forth latest malfunctions content ~

U3.08. Cumulative operation time during malfunction 4 The forth latest malfunction cumulative operation time 1H

U3.09. malfunction record 5 the fifth latest malfunctions content ~

U3.10. Cumulative operation time during malfunction 5 The fifth latest malfunction cumulative operation time 1H

Page 57: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Parameter Tables

4-5

U4 Current Malfunction Info Recording The followings indicate the recording parameter of current malfunction info

Parameter

NO

Name

Content minimum unit

U4.01. malfunction record current malfunction record ~

U4.02. frequency instruction frequency instruction of current malfunction 0.01Hz

U4.03. output frequency output instruction of current malfunction 0.01Hz

U4.04. feedback frequency unused 0.01Hz

U4.05. output current output current of current malfunction 0.1A

U4.06. instruction moment force Instruction moment force of current malfunction 0.1%

U4.07. output voltage output voltage of current malfunction 1V

U4.08. DC bus voltage DC bus voltage of current malfunction 1V

U4.09. heatsink temperature heatsink of current malfunction 1℃

U4.10. input/output terminal state input/output terminal state when malfunction

input/output terminal state of current malfunction ~

U4.11. expanding input/output terminal state expanding input/output terminal state of current malfunction ~

U4.12. F1 input voltage value F1 input voltage value of current malfunction 0.1%

U4.13. F2 input voltage value F2 input voltage value of current malfunction 0.1%

U4.14. running state running state of current malfunction(refer to P6-60) ~

U4.15. ASR state ASR state of current malfunction(refer to P6-60) ~

U4.16. assistant info during operation problem assistant info during operation problem ~

Page 58: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Parameter Tables

4-6

OP: system operation parameters In system operation parameters(parameter A),functions such as the access of the password,

selflearning and initialization can be set. control mode

Param

-eter

NO.

Name Content minimum

unit

factory

setting

storage

method V/F

Sensor

less

vector

non-sync

hronous

PG

vector

non-

synchronous

PG magnetic

Flux

Synchronous

PG vector

synchronous

PG magnetic

Flux

Refer

-ence

page

OP1. Parameter access

password 1

0000~

9999 0000 ☆ × × × × × ×

OP2. Parameter access

password2

Used for coding authority

in system parameter

modification 0000~

9999 0000 ☆ × × × × × ×

OP3. selflearning

Motor parameter selflearning

0: inter line resistor(static)

1:inter line resistor and motor

leakage resistance%(static)

2:interline resistor, motor

leakage resistance % and

no load current(rotary)

3:magnetic pole position

0~3 0 ☆ × × × × × ×

OP4. Initialization

Initialization of system

parameter

0: standard initialization

1-32: customized

Initialization

0~32 0 ☆ × × × × × ×

OP5.

Clear the

malfunction

record

Clear the monitoring

content of malfunction

record

0,1 0 ☆ × × × × × ×

OP6. Trial operation ☆ × × × × × ×

OP7 E2PROM rewrite

E2PROM

unused × × × × × ×

OP8 System password 0000~

FFFF × × × × × ×

OP9 Undefine × × × × × ×

Page 59: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Parameter Tables

4-7

A:Setup Settings The following settings are made with the envirnment constants(A constants):Language displayed on the Digital Operator.access level,control,initialization of constants.

A1. Drive hardware circumstance the followings are the drive hardware circumstance t parameters

control mode

Parameter

NO.

Name

content setting

range

factory

setting

storage

method V/F

sensor

less

vector

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

Magnetic

flux

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

Synchr

-onous

PG

magnetic

flux

Refer

-ence

page

A1.01. drive capacitor do not set while unauthorized * * ☆ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎

A1.02 Drive type Do not set when unauthorized - - ☆ × × × × × ×

A1.03 Voltage of power source set the voltage class of power

source

360/380/

400/420380 ☆ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎

A1.04 Expanding card type Do not set when unauthorized - 0 ☆ × × × × × ×

A1.05 Motor type Do not set when unauthorized - 0 ☆ × × × × × ×

A1.06 Encoder type

0:ABZ increment model

1:ABZUVW increment model

2:SINCOS

3: rotary transformer

4: single loop absolute value

5: multicell loop absolute value

6: magnetic encoder

0,1,2,3,

4,5,60 ☆ × × × × × ×

Page 60: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Parameter Tables

4-8

A2. Drive control circumstance the followings are the drive control circumstance parameters

control mode

parameter

NO.

Name

content setting

range

factory

setting

storage

method V/F

sensor

less

vector

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

magnetic

flux

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

Synchr

-onous PG

magnetic

flux

Refer

-ence

page

A2.01. Motor control mode

motor control mode of drive:

0:V/F control

1:sensorless vector control

2:magnetic flux vector

control

3:current vector control

4:PMSM vector control

5:PMSM magnetic flux vector

control

0~5 0 ☆ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎

A2.02. carrier frequencySet the carrier frequency of the

drive 2.0~16.0 10.0K ☆ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎

A2.03. carrier frequency

lower limit

Set the lower limit carrier

frequency of the drive 2.0~16.0 8.0K ☆ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎

A2.04. carrier frequency

upper limit

Set the upper limit carrier

frequency of the drive 2.0~50 50K ☆ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎

A2.05 current compensation 0: invalid 1: valid 0,1 0 ☆ ○ ○ ○ × ○ ×

Page 61: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Parameter Tables

4-9

A3. Expanding function The following indicates expanding function parameters

control mode

parameter

NO.

Name

content setting

range

factory

setting

storage

method V/F

sensor

less

vector

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

magnetic

flux

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

Synchr

-onous PG

magnetic

flux

Refer

-ence

page

A3.01. Expanding function

selection

0: invalid

1: special programm

2: simple PLC mode

3: positioning

4: PID

5: principal axis

10:Staircase

11:Electric elevator

12:Door machine

13:Brake

0~99 0 ☆ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎

A3.02. Expanding function

Valid word

0: invalid

1~98:single function is valid

99:all zhe function is valid

0~99 0 ☆ × × × × × ×

A3.03.

The menu

concealing a

programming

chooses when

Expand function

usage

0:invalid

1:Go into effect(when choose

the extended function 、

Expanding a menu is effective、

Password 2 is effective,conceal

the programming menu)

0,1 0 ☆ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Page 62: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Parameter Tables

4-10

◆ B:Application Parameter

In application parameters(parameter B), The running mode, speed search, mode and so on can be set.

B1.Running Mode The following indicates the parameters in running mode

control mode

Parm

-eter

NO.

Name

content setting

range

factory

setting

storage

method V/F

Sensor

Less

ector

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

magnetic

flux

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

Synchr

-onous

PG

magnetic

flux

Refer

-ence

page

B1.01. Running instruction

selection

Set the input method of running instruction

0:operator

1:outer control

2:Serial

0,1,2 1 ☆ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎

B1.02.

Running mode

selection

Set the input method of frequency instruction

0:Forward/Reberse

1: 3-wire operating instruction

2: Use energy and direction

0,1,2 0 ☆ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎

B1.03.Stopping mode

selection

0: inertia stop

1: decelerating stop

2: time limited decelerating stop

3: DC braking inertia stop

4: All range DC braking stop

0~4 0 ☆ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

B1.04.

Frequency instruction

selection

Set the input method of frequency instruction

0: operator

1: outer terminal control

2: analog terminal (active following)

3: analog terminal

4: superset

5: torque control

6:pulse control

0~6 1 ☆ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎

B1.05.Set mode of analog

instruction

when the frequency instruction

is given by analog signal, select

the analog signal pathway

0: analog terminal 1

1: analog terminal 2

2: analog terminal 3

3: analog terminal 1+ analogterminal 2

4:expanding card 1

5:expanding card 2

6:expanding card 3

7:expanding card 4

8:pulse input

0~8 0 ☆ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎

Page 63: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Parameter Tables

4-11

control mode

parameter

NO.

name

content setting

range

factory

setting

storage

method V/F

Sensor

less

vector

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

magnetic

flux

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

Synchr

-onous

PG

Magnetic

flux

reference

page

B1.06.

select the output

frequency action of

under lowest output

frequency

Set the running choice for given

frequency lower than lowest

operation

0: running according to frequency

choice

1: zero speed operation

2:running as E2.05

3: The base electrode is blockaded

0~3 0 ☆ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

B1.07. Reverse selection 0: can reverse

1: can not reverse 0,1 0 ☆ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎

B1.08.

Reaccelerating

prohibition

Reaccelerating prohibition selection

when receive speed up instruction

during decelerating

0:can Reaccelerating

1:can Reaccelerating

0、1 0 ☆ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎

B1.09 DC braking current

Take drive rating current as

100%, set DC braking current

with the unit %

0~150 100% ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

B1.10. DWELL frequency

when starting up

0.00~

2.500.00 Hz ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

B1.11.

DWELL time when

starting up

Keep output frequency momently

to prevent the motor from

entering stall state when start

up big inertia load

0.00~

2.500.00S ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

B1.12. Un common stop mode

choice

0: decelerating terminal

control in unusual condition

1: unusual decelerating

terminal are ineffective , use

unusual decelerating

time(elevator mode)for

inching

0,1 1 ☆ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

B1.13 Start location locking

choice

On decision electric motor, the

electricity runs if the front carry out

the choice that location locks

0:invalid

1:Effective

0,1 0 ☆ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Page 64: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Parameter Tables

4-12

B2. Speed Search The following are speed search parameters

control mode

parameter

NO.

Name

content setting

range

factory

setting

storage

method V/F

Sensor

less

vector

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

magnetic

flux

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

Synchr

-onous

PG

magnetic

flux

Refer

-ence

page

B2.01. Speed search

selection

Set the accelerating search

during starting up

0:valid

1:invalid

0~1 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

B2.02. Action current of

speed search

Take drive rated current as 100%,

set DC braking current with the

unit % as action current

0~200 100% ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

B2.03. searching time of

speed search

Set the output frequency decelerating

time of speed search action with s the

unit, please set the deceleration time

from the highest to the lowest output

frequency

0.1~20.0 1.0S ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

B2.04. Waiting time of

speed search

If there is contactor in the output side

of the drive, please set delaying

time for contactor; running from

instant reset, waiting for the set time

and start the speed search action.

0.00~2.50 0.5S ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

B2.05. DC voltage recovering

time

After the speed search, time

spent in setting the output

voltage of the drive to recover to

normal voltage

0.1~25.0 2.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

B2.06.

Search method for

the initial position

of magnetic pole

0: invalid(unused)

1:locked

2:unlocked

0~2 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

B2.07.

Magnetic pole testing

valve value

displacement

unused 0.1~25.0 1.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Page 65: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Parameter Tables

4-13

◆ C: curve time sequence parameter In curve time sequence parameter(c parameter), accelerating and decelerating time,

Corner time and running time sequence can be set.

C1. accelerating and decelerating time the followings are the accelerating and decelerating time parameters

control mode

Parameter

NO.

Name

content setting

range

factory

setting

storage

method V/F

sensor

less

vector

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

non-

Synchr

-Onous

PG

magnetic

flux

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

Synchr

-onous

PG

magneti

c flux

Refer

-ence

page

C1.01. Accelerating time 1

Accelerating time form 0% to 100%

maximum frequency, measured by

second

0.10~600.00 2.50S ◎ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

C1.02. 1decelerating time1

Accelerating time form 0% to 100%

maximum frequency, measured by

second

0.10~600.00 2.50S ◎ × × × × × ×

C1.03. Accelerating time2 Accelerating time 2/ /principle axis

positioning accelerating time 0.10~600.00 5.00S ◎ × × × × × ×

C1.04. decelerating time2 decelerating time 2/principle axis

positioning decelerating time 0.10~600.00 5.00S ◎ × × × × × ×

C1.05. Accelerating time 3 Accelerating time 3 0.10~600.00 2.00S ◎ × × × × × ×

C1.06. decelerating time3

decelerating time3 0.10~600.00 2.00S

◎ × × × × × ×

C1.07. Accelerating time 4 Accelerating time 4 0.10~600.00 2.00S ◎ × × × × × ×

C1.08. decelerating time 4 decelerating time 4 0.10~600.00 2.00S ◎ × × × × × ×

C1.09. Abnormal stop

decelerating time

Set abnormal stop time as 100% to

0% deceleration time 0.1~20.0 2.0S ◎ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

C1.10. accelerating switch

frequency

Set auto switch accelerating

frequency.. Multifunctional input”

acceleration time selecting”

is superior to auto switch

0~300.00 0.00Hz ◎ × × × × × ×

C1.11. decelerating switch

frequency

Set auto switch accelerating

frequency. Multifunctional input”

deceleration time selecting”

is superior to auto switch

0~300.00 0.00Hz ◎ × × × × × ×

C1.12.

Accelerating and

decelerating switch

Choose Effective

Set up adding the time choice

reducing the speed use an energy

0:invalid

1:Effective

0,1 0 ☆ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Page 66: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Parameter Tables

4-14

C2. Accelerating and Decelerating Corner Time

The followings are accelerating and decelerating corner time. Control Mode

Parameter

NO.

Name

Content Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Storage

Method V/F

sensor

less

vector

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

non-

Synchr

-onous PG

magnetic

flux

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

Synchr

-onous

PG

magnetic

flux

Refer

-ence

page

C2.01. Accelerating start

corner time 0.01~2.50 0.90S ◎ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

C2.02. Accelerating end

corner time 0.01~2.50 0.60S ◎ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

C2.03. decelerating start

corner time 0.01~2.50 0.60S ◎ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

C2.04. decelerating start

corner time

0.01~2.50 0.90S ◎ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

C3.Running Time Sequence The followings are running time sequence parameters

Control Mode

Parameter

NO.

Name

Content setting

range

factory

setting

storage

method V/F

sensor

less

vector

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

non-

Synchr

-onous PG

magnetic

flux

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

Synchr

-onous

PG

magnetic

flux

Refer

-ence

page

C3.01.

Minimum base

electrode blocking

time

Set the minimum base electrode

blocking time measured by

second.

0.1~2.50 0.50S ◎ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

C3.02. DC braking time

during startup

The primary excitation time from

accepting of running instruction

to executing.

0.00~2.50 0.30S ◎ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

C3.03. Open gate delay

time

After the excitation, drive send

band breaking signal. When the

cut off delay time(make sure the

band breaking is on)passed, the

drive will start to respond

frequency instruction.

0.00~2.50 0.20S ◎ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

C3.04 Start delay time 0.01~2.50 0.20S ◎ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

C3.05. DC braking time

during stop

The delayed time from canceling

of the running instruction to

cutting of the drive output

0.00~2.50 0.50S ◎ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

C.2.01.

C.2.02. C.2.03.

C.2.04.Time

Export

Page 67: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Parameter Tables

4-15

C3.06 Output stops transit

time

Break electric motor output force

moment interruption of power

supply transit time up gradually

0.00~2.50 0.00S ◎ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

C3.07 Export contactor

action delay time 0.00~2.50 0.20S ◎ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

D: frequency instruction parameter

In the frequency instruction parameter(D parameter), frequency instruction, frequency

instruction relation and jump frequency can be set.

D1. Frequency instruction The followings are frequency instruction parameters

control mode

Parameter

NO.

Name

content setting

range

factory

setting

storage

method V/F

sensor

less

vector

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

magnetic

flux

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

Synchr

-onous

PG

magnetic

flux

Refer

-ence

page

D1.01. Frequency

instruction 1

use the frequency that set by the operator0.00~300.00 0.00Hz ◎ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

D1.02. Frequency

instruction 2

Frequency instruction when

Multifunctional input terminal ”

multi speed range instruction 1 ” is on.

0.00~300.00 0.00Hz ◎ × × × × × ×

D1.03. Frequency

instruction 1

Frequency instruction when

Multifunctional input terminal

”multi speed range instruction 2 ” is on.

0.00~300.00 0.00Hz ◎ × × × × × ×

D1.04. Frequency

instruction4

Frequency instruction when

Multifunctional input terminal ”multi

speed range instruction 1,2 ” is on.

0.00~300.00 0.00Hz ◎ × × × × × ×

D1.05. Frequency

instruction 5

Frequency instruction when

Multifunctional input terminal ”multi

speed range instruction 3 ” is on.

0.00~300.00 0.00Hz ◎ × × × × × ×

D1.06. Frequency

instruction 6

Frequency instruction when

Multifunctional input terminal ”multi

speed range instruction 1,3 ” is on.

0.00~300.00 0.00Hz ◎ × × × × × ×

D1.07. Frequency

instruction 7

Frequency instruction when

Multifunctional input terminal ”multi

speed range instruction 2,3” is on.

0.00~300.00 0.00Hz ◎ × × × × × ×

D1.08. Frequency

instruction8

Frequency instruction when

Multifunctional input terminal ”multi

speed range instruction 1,2,3 ” is on.

0.00~300.00 0.00Hz ◎ × × × × × ×

D1.09. Point start

frequency

Frequency instruction when

Multifunctional input terminal ”multi

speed range instruction 4 ” is on.

0.00~300.00 5.00Hz ◎ × × × × × ×

Page 68: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Parameter Tables

4-16

D2. Frequency Instruction relationship

The followings are the parameters of frequency instruction. control mode

Parameter

NO.

Name

content setting

range

factory

setting

storage

method V/F

sensor

less

vector

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

magnetic

flux

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

Synchr

-onous

PG

magnet

ic flux

Refer

-ence

page

D2.01. Maximum output

frequency (FMAX )

Highest output frequency the drive

allowed 10.00~300.00 50.0Hz ☆ × × × × × ×

D2.02. Upper limit

The upper limit value of output

frequency, the highest frequency is

100%, measured by %

0.0~110.00 100.00% ☆ × × × × × ×

D2.03. Lower limit

The lower limit value of output

frequency, the highest frequency is

100%, measured by %

0.0~100.00 0.00% ☆ × × × × × ×

D2.04. Frequency instruction

filter time 1~200 10mS ○ ○ × × × × ×

D2.05. Instruction source of

upper limit

Choices of Upper limit frequency

instruction

0: operator setup

1:analog terminal F1

2:analog terminal F2

3:analog terminal F3

0~3 0 ☆ × × × × × ×

D3. Jump Frequency The followings are the jump frequency parameters

control mode

Parameter

NO.

Name

content setting

range

factory

setting

storage

method V/F

sensor

less

vector

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

non-

Synchr

-onous PG

magnetic

flux

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

Synchr

-onous

PG

magnet

ic

flux

Refer

-ence

page

D3.01. jump frequency 1 0.0~300.0 0.0Hz ○ × × × × × ×

D3.02. jump frequency 2

Set the central value jump frequency

which is measured by Hz, jump

frequency is invalid when set the jump

frequency 0.0 0.0~300.0 0.0Hz ○ × × × × × ×

D3.03. Jump frequency

amplitude

Set the central value jump frequency

amplitude which is measured by Hz,

(±D3.03.is leap frequency range)

0.0~300.0 0.00Hz ○ × × × × × ×

Page 69: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Parameter Tables

4-17

E: Motor Parameter

In motor parameter(E parameter), the drive’s environment parameter, motor parameter, V/F Characteristic parameter, ASR characteristic parameter and torque make up parameter can be set.

E1. V/F Characteristic The followings are V/F characteristic.

control mode

Parameter

NO.

Name

content setting

range

factory

setting

storage

method V/F

Sensor

less

vector

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

magnetic

flux

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

Synchr

-onous

PG

magnetic

flux

Refer

-ence

page

E1.01. Fundamental frequency(FA) 0.0~300.0 50.0Hz ○ ◎ × × × × ×

E1.02. (VMAX)Maximum output voltage 0.0~500.0 380.0V ○ ◎ × × × × ×

E1.03. Intermediate output

frequency(FB) 0.0~300.0 3.0Hz ○ ◎ × × × × ×

E1.04. Intermediate output voltage

(VC ) 0.0~400.0 15.0V ○ ◎ × × × × ×

E1.05. lowest output frequency(FMIN) 0.0~300.0 1.5Hz ○ ◎ × × × × ×

E1.06. lowest output voltage(VMIN)

Voltage (V)

FA

VMAX

FBFMIN

VCVMIN

FMAX

Frequency (Hz)

0.0~400.0 9.0V ○ ◎ × × × × ×

E2. Motor Parameter The followings are the motor parameters.

control mode

Parameter

NO.

Name

content setting

range

factory

setting

storage

method V/F

sensor

less

vector

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

magnetic

flux

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

Synchr

-onous

PG

magnetic

flux

Refer

-ence

page

E2.01. Rated power of motor Set up the power of motor 0.1~200.0 11.0* ○ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎

E2.02. Number of poles set up the number of poles 2~48 4 ☆ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎

E2.03. Rated current of motor

Set up rated current of motor.

The setting are the basic value of

motor protecting.

0.1~500.0 24.5A* ○ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎

rated voltage of motor set up the rated voltage

of motor

E2.04.

Rated inductive potential

Corresponding inductive

potential when Rated rotary

speed of PMSM

1~500 360V* ○ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎

E2.05. Rated frequency of motor Set the rated frequency of motor

Fe=Ne*P/120 0.00~300.00 50.0Hz ○ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎

Page 70: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Parameter Tables

4-18

control mode

Parameter

NO.

Name

content setting

range

factory

setting

storage

method V/F

sensor

less

vector

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

magnetic

flux

synchr

onous

PG

vector

Synchr

-onous

PG

magnetic

flux

Refer

-ence

page

E2.06. rated rotating speed of

motor

Set up the rated rotating speed

of motor 1~6000

1450RP

M ○ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎

E2.07. No load current of motor Set the no load current of the

motor 0.1~500.0 10.5A* ○ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎

E2.08. rated slip of motor set up the rated slip of motor 0.10~20.00 1.50Hz* ○ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ × ×

E2.09. Interline resistor of motor set the interline resistor of

motor 0.01~5.000 0.922* ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × ×

E2.10. Motor leakage resistance

the voltage drop caused by

the motor leakage , set by %

the rated voltage of motor

0.0~60.0 18.0% ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × ×

E2.11. DOWN%

Low speed slip

Set the rated slop as 100%, set

the motor’s 0Hz control slip

decrement

0~100 50% ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × ×

E2.12. UP%

High speed slip UP%

taking the rated slip as 100%,

set the slip compensation dosage

above basic frequency

0~100 5% ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × ×

E3.13. Lower limit of exciting

current damping

When the motor are running

above basic frequency, the

exciting current can be brought

down automatically by the drive

to avoid the magnetic saturation

and realize light magnetic

control. % of no load are used to

set the lower limit of the light

magnetic control.

10~100 50% ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Page 71: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Parameter Tables

4-19

E3. Second Motor V/F Characteristic The followings are V/F characteristic.

control mode

Parameter

NO.

Name

content setting

range

factory

setting

storage

method V/F

Sensor

less

vector

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

magnetic

flux

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

Synchr

-onous

PG

magnetic

flux

Refer

-ence

page

E3.01. Fundamental frequency(FA) 0.0~300.0 50.0Hz ○ ◎ × × × × ×

E3.02. (VMAX)Maximum output voltage 0.0~500.0 380.0V ○ ◎ × × × × ×

E3.03. Intermediate output

frequency(FB) 0.0~300.0 3.0Hz ○ ◎ × × × × ×

E3.04. Intermediate output voltage

(VC ) 0.0~400.0 15.0V ○ ◎ × × × × ×

E3.05. lowest output frequency(FMIN) 0.0~300.0 1.5Hz ○ ◎ × × × × ×

E3.06. lowest output voltage(VMIN)

Voltage (V)

FA

VMAX

FBFMIN

VCVMIN

FMAX

Frequency (Hz)

0.0~400.0 9.0V ○ ◎ × × × × ×

E4.Second Motor Parameter The followings are the motor parameters.

control mode

Parameter

NO.

Name

content setting

range

factory

setting

storage

method V/F

sensor

less

vector

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

magnetic

flux

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

Synchr

-onous

PG

magnetic

flux

Refer

-ence

page

E4.01. Rated power of motor Set up the power of motor 0.1~200.0 11.0* ○ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎

E4.02. Number of poles set up the number of poles 2~48 4 ☆ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎

E4.03. Rated current of motor

Set up rated current of motor.

The setting are the basic value of

motor protecting.

0.1~500.0 24.5A* ○ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎

rated voltage of motor set up the rated voltage

of motor

E4.04.

Rated inductive potential

Corresponding inductive

potential when Rated rotary

speed of PMSM

1~500 360V* ○ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎

E4.05. Rated frequency of motor Set the rated frequency of motor

Fe=Ne*P/120 0.00~300.00 50.0Hz ○ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎

Page 72: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Parameter Tables

4-20

control mode

Parameter

NO.

Name

content setting

range

factory

setting

storage

method V/F

sensor

less

vector

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

magnetic

flux

synchr

onous

PG

vector

Synchr

-onous

PG

magnetic

flux

Refer

-ence

page

E4.06. rated rotating speed of

motor

Set up the rated rotating speed

of motor 1~6000

1450RP

M ○ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎

E4.07. No load current of motor Set the no load current of the

motor 0.1~500.0 10.5A* ○ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎

E4.08. rated slip of motor set up the rated slip of motor 0.10~20.00 1.50Hz* ○ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ × ×

E4.09. Interline resistor of motor set the interline resistor of

motor 0.01~5.000 0.922* ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × ×

E4.10. Motor leakage resistance

the voltage drop caused by

the motor leakage , set by %

the rated voltage of motor

0.0~60.0 18.0% ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × ×

E4.11. DOWN%

Low speed slip

Set the rated slop as 100%, set

the motor’s 0Hz control slip

decrement

0~100 50% ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × ×

E4.12. UP%

High speed slip UP%

taking the rated slip as 100%,

set the slip compensation dosage

above basic frequency

0~100 5% ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × ×

E4.13. Lower limit of exciting

current damping

When the motor are running

above basic frequency, the

exciting current can be brought

down automatically by the drive

to avoid the magnetic saturation

and realize light magnetic

control. % of no load are used to

set the lower limit of the light

magnetic control.

10~100 50% ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Page 73: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Parameter Tables

4-21

E5. ASR Characteristics

The followings are ASR characteristic parameters control mode

Parameter

NO.

Name

content setting

range

factory

setting

storage

method V/F

Sensor

less

vector

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

magnetic

flux

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

Synchr

-onous

PG

magnetic

flux

Refer

-ence

page

E5.01. high speed proportion gain 0~100 20 ○ × × ○ ○ ○ ○

E5.02. low speed proportion gain 0~100 30 ○ × × ○ ○ ○ ○

E5.03. starting proportion gain 0~100 30 ○ × × ○ ○ ○ ○

E5.04. high speed integration time 0~1000 500mS ○ × × ○ ○ ○ ○

E5.05. low speed integration time 0~1000 100mS ○ × × ○ ○ ○ ○

E5.06. staring integration time

E5.01. E5.04.

E5.02. E5.05.

Feedback frequencyE5.07.

P,I

0~1000 50mS ○ × × ○ ○ ○ ○

E5.07. ASR switching

frequency

High speed, low speed speed

gain, switching frequency

of integrating time

0.00~

300.0050.00Hz ○ × × ○ ○ ○ ○

E5.08. Upper limit of integrating Upper limit of integrating

measured by % 0~100 100% ○ × × ○ ○ ○ ○

E5.09. Torque filter time Delay of instruction torque

, measured by mS 0.2~25.0 1.0mS ○ × × ○ ○ ○ ○

E5.10. Drive torque upper

limit

0.0~

300.0150.0% ○ × × ○ ○ ○ ○

E5.11.

Braking torque

upper limit

When the torque of the motor reach to

upper limit, motor rotated speed

becomes invalid because of the torque

superiority. So the

accelerating and decelerating

Time Increased and rotated

speed go down.

0.0~

300.0150.0% ○ × × ○ ○ ○ ○

E5.12. Source of torque

upper limit

Set the source of torque upper limit of

drive:

0:operator

1: analog terminal

F2(amplitude value)

2: analog terminalF2(damping)

0~2 0 ○ × × ○ ○ ○ ○

E5.13. Torque limit

changing time

Velocity of torque limit change,

0~100% time needed to describe

0.01~2.5

0 1.00 ○ × × ○ ○ ○ ○

E5.14. current gain damping

% during decelerating

When there are mechanical

vibration during decelerating in

high speed , please increase the set

value.

0~90 0 ○ × × ○ × ○ ×

Page 74: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Parameter Tables

4-22

control mode

Parameter

NO.

Name

content setting

range

factory

setting

storage

method V/F

sensor

less

vector

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

magnetic

flux

synchr

onous

PG

vector

Synchr

-onous

PG

magnetic

flux

Refer

-ence

page

E5.15. Vibration restrain

Increase the setting value during

Sersorless vector control , when

vibration happens the motor

is in high speed and light load

0~50 0% ○ × ○ × × × ×

E5.16 position servo gain Proportion gain in position

close loop control 0.0~10.0 1.0 ○ × × ○ ○ ○ ○

E5.17 current gain the current Proportion gain 20~150 50% ○ ○ ○ ○ × ○ ×

E5.18 0 Hz electric current gain Proportion gain that electric

current is encircled by 0 Hz 20~100 60% ○ ○ ○ ○ × ○ ×

E6.torque compensation The followings are torque compensation parameters

control mode

Parameter

NO.

Name

content

setting

range

factory

setting

storage

method V/F

Sensor

less

vector

non-sy

nchron

ous PG

vector

non-

Synchr

onous

-PG

magnetic

flux

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

Synchr

-Onous

PG

magnetic

flux

Refer

-ence

page

E6.01. Torque elevating

gain

In V/F control mode, set the

torque elevating gain according to the

following situation:

increase the set value when

the cable is too long

increase the set value when the

motor capacitor is smaller than the

driver capacitor.

Reduce the set value when the

motor vibrates

0.00~2.50 1.00 ○ ○ × × × × ×

E6.02. Torque elevating

delay time

set the relay time of torque elevating

function 10~10000 200ms ○ ○ × × × × ×

E6.03 Enable of Speed

drop compensation

In V/F control mode, the enable of

speed deviation compensation caused 0,1 0 ☆ ○ × × × × ×

E6.04.

Speed drop

compensation in

regeneration

Select whether carrying on

rotated speed drop compensation

in the regenerating situation

0,1 0 ☆ ○ × × × × ×

E6.05. Compensation time

of rotor

delay time for speed drop

compensation 10~10000 200ms ○ ○ × × × × ×

Page 75: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Parameter Tables

4-23

E7.position control The followings are position control parameters

control mode

Parameter

NO.

Name

content

setting

range

factory

setting

storage

method V/F

Sensor

less

vector

non-sy

nchron

ous PG

vector

non-

Synchr

onous

-PG

magnetic

flux

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

Synchr

-Onous

PG

magnetic

flux

Refer

-ence

page

E7.01. Position servo plus Location gain time pulse being

controlled 1~100 20 ○ ○ × × × × ×

E7.02. Zero-servo frequency

upper limit 100%

Zero location state does localized

chief axis frequency upper limit 1~100 10ms ○ ○ × × × × ×

E7.03 Forward position plus Going forward time pulse being

controlled breaks gain through 1~100 0 ☆ ○ × × × × ×

E7.04. Pulse filter time Wave filtering time time pulse being

controlled 1.0~2.5 3.0 ☆ ○ × × × × ×

E7.05 Fix position ending

the width outputing

E7.06 Approach signal

width

Page 76: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Parameter Tables

4-24

H: external terminal function parameters

In external terminal function parameters(H parameter), multifunctional connector input(output)parameter, analog input paramerter can be set.

H1. Multifunctional Connector Input The following are multifunctional connector input parameters.

control mode

Parameter

NO.

Name

content setting

range

factory

setting

storage

method V/F

sensor

less

vector

non-

Synchronous

PG vector

non-synchr

-onous PG

magnetic

flux

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

Synchr

-onous

PG

magnetic

flux

Refer

-ence

page.

H1.01.

Function selecting

of Multifunctional

input terminal X3

Multifunctional input 1

(factory setting is multi

speed stage 1)

1~31 1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

H1.02.

Function selecting

of Multifunctional

input terminal X4

Multifunctional input 2

(factory setting is multi

speed stage 2)

1~31 2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

H1.03.

Function selecting

of Multifunctional

input terminal X5

Multifunctional input3

(factory setting is multi

speed stage 3)

1~31 3 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

H1.04.

Function selecting

of Multifunctional

input terminal X6

Multifunctional input 4

(factory setting is point

starting instruction)

1~31 6 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

H1.05.

Function selecting

of Multifunctional

input terminal X7

Multifunctional input 5

(factory setting is

malfunction resetting)

1~31 21 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

H1.06.

Function selecting

of Multifunctional

input terminal X8

Multifunctional input 6

(factory setting is base

electrode locked)

1~31 24 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

H1.07.

Function selecting

of Multifunctional

input terminal X9

Undefine 1~31 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Page 77: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Parameter Tables

4-25

H2. Multifunctional connector output The followings are parameters of multifunctional connector output.

control mode

Parameter

NO.

Name

content setting

range

factory

setting

storage

method V/F

non-

Synchr

-onous PG

vector

non-

synchronous

PG

magnetic

flux

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

Synchr

-onous

PG

magnetic

flux

non-

synchronous

PG vector

Refer

-ence

page

H2.01.

function selection

Of multifunctional

output terminal MI

Output of multifunctional

relay(factory setting

is band break control)

1~30 8 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

H2.02.

Function selection

of Multifunctional

output terminal Y1

Multifunctional

electronic output1

(factory setting is

operation)

1~30 2 ○ × × × × × ×

H2.03.

Function selection

of Multifunctional

output terminal Y2

Multifunctional

electronic output1

(factory setting

is operation)

1~30 1 ○ × × × × × ×

H2.04.

Function selection

of Multifunctional

output terminal Y3

Function Selection of

Expanding output

terminal 3

0~30 7 ○ × × × × × ×

Page 78: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Parameter Tables

4-26

H3. analog quality input The following are analog quality input parameter

control mode

Parameter

NO.

Name

content setting

range

factory

setting

storage

method V/F

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

Magnetic

flux

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

Synchr

-onous

PG

magnetic

flux

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

Refer

-ence

page

H3.01 analog qualityinput select F1

0:±10V

1:0~10V

2:4~20mA

3: 0~20mA

0,1,2,3 1 ☆ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

H3.02. Output gain

of terminal F1

Analog input value %of all

functions when F1 terminal

input is 10V(voltage),

20mA(current)

0.0~1000.0 100.0% ☆ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

H3.03. Output deviation

of terminal F1

Analog input value %of all

functions when F1 terminal

input is 0V(voltage),

4mA(current)

-100.0~

100.0 0.0 ☆ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

H3.04 analog quality input select F2

0:±10V

1:0~10V

2:4~20mA

3: 0~20mA

0,1,2,3 0 ☆ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

H3.05. Output gain

of terminal F2 The same as H3.02. 0.0~1000.0 100.0% ☆ × × × × × ×

H3.06. Output deviation

of terminal F2 The same as H3.03

-100.0~

100.0 0.0 ☆ × × × × × ×

H3.07 analog quality input select F3

0:±10V

1:0~10V

2:4~20mA

3: 0~20mA

0,1,2,3 0 ☆ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

H3.08 Output gain

of terminal F3 The same as H3.02. 0.0~1000.0 100.0% ☆ × × × × × ×

H3.09 Output deviation

of terminal F3 The same as H3.03

-100.0~

100.0 0.0 ☆ × × × × × ×

H3.10. Analog input

terminal filter time1

Filter time of Analog

input sigaal 1~1000 10mS ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

H3.11.

Zero potential

threshold of analog

input value

absolute value of analog

input voltage signal is

smaller than set zero value

0.00~10.00 0.00V ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Page 79: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Parameter Tables

4-27

control mode

Parameter

NO.

Name

content setting

range

factory

setting

storage

method V/F

non-

Synchr

-onous PG

vector

non-

synchronous

PG

magnetic

flux

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

Synchr

-onous

PG

magnetic

flux

non-

synchronous

PG vector

Refer

-ence

page

H3.12. highest frequency of

gain switching

Set corresponding

proportion of highest

frequency of gain switching

with D2.01 for reference.

0.0~

50.0 0.0% ☆ × × ○ ○ ○ ○

H3.13. Analog input

terminal filter time2

Filter time of Analog

input sigaal 1~1000 10mS ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

H4. Analog Output The followings are parameters of analog output.

control mode

Param

-eter

NO.

Name

content setting

range

factory

setting

storage

method V/F

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

Magnetic

flux

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

Synchr

-onous

PG

magnetic

flux

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

Refer

-ence

page

H4.01. Monitoring item

of terminal FM

Set monitoring case number from

multifunctional analog output

terminal(from U1.01.~U1.09

part selection of 01~09)

1~17 0 ☆ × × × × × ×

H4.02. Output gain

of terminal FM

Set the voltage gain ouput from

multifunctional analog output terminal

FM

0.0~

1000.0100.0% ☆ × × × × × ×

H4.03. Output deviation

of terminal FM

Set the voltage deviation ouput from

multifunctional analog output terminal

FM

-100.0~

100.00.0 ☆ × × × × × ×

H4.04. Monitoring item

of terminal AM

Set monitoring case number from

multifunctional analog output

terminal(from U1.01.~U1.09

part selection of 01~09)

1~17 0 ☆ × × × × × ×

H4.05. Output gain

of terminal AM

Set the voltage gain ouput from

multifunctional analog output terminal

AM

0.0~

1000.0100.0% ☆ × × × × × ×

H4.06. Output deviation

of terminal AM

Set the voltage deviation ouput from

multifunctional analog output terminal

AM

-100.0~

100.00.0 ☆ × × × × × ×

Page 80: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Parameter Tables

4-28

H5. Encoder Input/output The following are the code input/output parameters.

control mode

Parameter

NO.

Name

content setting

range

factory

setting

storage

method V/F

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

magneti

c

flux

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

Synchr

-onous

PG

Magnetic

flux

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

Refer

-ence

page.

H5.01. PG ulse number pulse number each rotate

using PG 0~20000 1024 ☆ × × ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎

H5.02. PG filtering time Filtering time for PG

signal 1.0~25.0 3mS ☆ × × ○ ○ ○ ○

H5.03. Phase sequence

of PG

0: Phase A lead when

motor is co-rotating

1: Phase A lead when

motor is co-rotating

0,1 0 ☆ × × ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎

H5.06. Function of phase Z 0: invalid

1: valid 0,1 0 ☆ × × ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎

H5.07. Offset electrical

angel of encoder 0.0~359.9 0.0 ☆ × × × × ◎ ◎

H5.10. C+/C-Reverse 0: invalid

1: valid 0,1 0 ☆ × × × × × ×

H5.11. Output frequency

dividing ratio

Set output pulse

frequency dividing ratio 1~64 4 ☆ × × × × × ×

Page 81: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Parameter Tables

4-29

H6.Pulse control

The followings are pulse control parameters. control mode

Parameter

NO.

Name

content setting

range

factory

setting

storage

method V/F

sensor

less

vector

non-

synchron

ous PG

vector

non-synchr

-onous

PG

magnetic

flux

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

Synchr

-onous

PG

Magnetic

flux

Parame

-ter

page

H6.01. set pulse mode

0: AB phase

1: PLUS + SIGN

2: CW + CCW

0~2 0 ☆ × × ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎

H6.02. PG2 ulse number pulse number each rotate

using PG2 0~20000 1024 ☆ × × ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎

H6.03. e1electronic

gear ratio 1~32767 1 ☆ × × × × × ×

H6.04. electronic

gear ratio

Factor of electronic gear

ratio, compose

1:100-100:1transformation ratio 1~32767 1 ○ × × × × × ×

H6.05. CLR enable

Selection of CLR correction

Function:

0: invalid

1: valid

0,1 0 ☆ × × × × × ×

H6.06. Multiple switched

function

0: invalid

1: valid 0.0~25.0 1.0s ☆ × × × × × ×

H6.07. Multiple 1 0.0~100 1.0

H6.08. Multiple 2 0.0~100 1.0

H6.09. Multiple 3

0.0~100 1.0

H6.10. Maximum pulse

frequency

Set D2.01 relevant input

pulse frequency kHz

0.0~100

0.0 100

H6.11 Wave filtering time Wave filtering time that

pulse imports 1.0~25.0 3.0 ☆ ○ × × × × ×

Page 82: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Parameter Tables

4-30

H7.MEMOBUS Communication What the following shows is that the coder signal imports the set-up parameter outputing

control mode

Parameter NO.

Name

content setting

range

factor

y

settin

g

storag

e

methodV/F

sensor

less

vector

non-

synchr

onous

PG

vector

non-sy

nchr

-onous

PG

magnet

ic flux

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

Synchr

-onous

PG

Magnet

ic

flux

Parame

-ter

page

H7.01.

Serial

communication

agreement

0 : MITSUBISHI FX2

Agreement

1:MEMOBUS Agreement

0,1 0 ☆ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

H7.02. Serial This machine mail address 1~31 1 ☆ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

H7.03. Serial's set up 80:Serial is by definition

9600,N,8,1 00~FF 80 ☆ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

H7.04. RTSChoose 0:422 Communication

1:485 Communication 0,1 0 ☆ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

H7.05.

Communication

interruption

protects action

Set up the protection way

that communication breaks

off:

0:Do not protect;

1:Slide stoppage freely;

2 : Reduce the speed

stopping;

3:Reduce the speed very

much stopping;

4:Warn

1~64 4 ☆ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

H7.06.

Communication

is interrupted

Protection time

Detecting time that

communication breaks off 0.1~25.0 1.0S ☆ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Page 83: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Parameter Tables

4-31

J: Assistant Function Parameter of External Terminal

In the assistant function parameter of external terminal, frequency detection, timer,

main axis positioning and gain switching etc. can be set.

J1. Frequency Detection The following are the frequency detection parameters.

control mode

Parameter

NO.

Name

content setting

range

factory

setting

storage

method V/F

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

non-

synchr

-onous

PG

magnetic

flux

synchr

-onous

PG

vector

Synchr

-onous

PG

magnetic

flux

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

Parame

-ter

page.

J1.01. Zero speed

threshold value

while deceleration-stop , set the

starting frequency of DC braking

with unit Hz

0.01~

2.500.50Hz ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

J1.02.

Frequency detecting

value of Speed

consistency

during the multifunctional

output set” randam frequency

consistency”, set the frequency

with the unit Hz

0.00~

300.000.00Hz ○ × × × × × ×

J1.03.

Frequency detecting

amplitude value

of Speed consistent

During the state of “ frequency

consistency”,”randam frequency

consistancy”,set the amplitude

with the unit Hz

0.10~

20.002.00Hz ○ × × × × × ×

Page 84: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Parameter Tables

4-32

J2. Torque Compensation The following are torque compensation parameters.

control mode

Paramete

r NO.

Name

content setting

range

factory

setting

storage

method V/F

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

magnetic

flux

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

Synchr

-onous

PG

Magnetic

flux

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

Param

-eter

page

J2.01. compensation mode

of torque deviation

0: no compensation

1: switching value compensation

2: analog value F2 input

compensation

0,1,2 0 ☆ × × ○ ○ ○ ○

J2.02.

Compensation torque

of cororandam

braking

Set compensation torque of

motor’s corotational braking

0.0%~

100.0%0.0% ○ × × ○ ○ ○ ○

J2.03.

Compensation torque

of back running

driving

Set Compensation torque of

back running drive

0.0%~

100.0%0.0% ○ × × ○ ○ ○ ○

J2.04.

Compensation torque

of cororandam

driving

Set Compensation torque

of cororandam driving

0.0%~

100.0%0.0% ○ × × ○ ○ ○ ○

J2.05.

Compensation torque

of back running

braking

Set Compensation torque of

back running braking

0.0%~

100.0%0.0% ○ × × ○ ○ ○ ○

J2.06. Time for torque

compensation

Set time Time for compensation

torque from zero the set value

0.01~

2.00 0.20S ○ × × ○ ○ ○ ○

J2.07. Direction of

torque ompensation

Set direction of torque

compensation 0,1 1 ○ × × ○ ○ ○ ○

J3. Timer The following are parameters of timer.

control mode

Parameter

NO.

Name

content setting

range

factory

setting

storage

method V/F

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG vector

non-

Synchronous

PG

magnetic

flux

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

Synchr

-onous

PG

magnetic

flux

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

Parame

-ter

page

J3.01. ON delay time

of timer

the input timer function with

unit second, set ON delay time

for timer output

0.0~300.0 0.0S ☆ × × × × × ×

J3.02. OFF delay time

of timer

The input timer function with

unit second, set OFF delay

time for timer output

0.0~300.0 0.0S ☆ × × × × × ×

Page 85: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Parameter Tables

4-33

J3.03. ON delay time

of timer 2

The input timer function with

unit second, set ON delay time

for timer output

0.0~300.0 0.0S ☆ × × × × × ×

J3.04. OFF delay time

of timer2

the input timer function with

unit second, set OFF delay

time for timer output

0.0~300.0 0.0S ☆ × × × × × ×

J4. Positioning of Principal Axis The following are positioning parameters of principal axis

control mode

Parameter

NO.

Name

content setting

range

factory

setting

storage

method V/F

non-

Synchr

-onous PG

vector

non-synchr

-onous PG

magnetic

flux

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

Synchr

-onous PG

magnetic

flux

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

Parame

-ter

page.

J4.01. Positioning angle

of principal axis

Take position of phase Z as

0˚ reference, set the position

of principal axis

0.0~359.9 0.0 ○ × × × × × ×

J4.02.

Range of

Positioning

accuracy

set Range of principle

Positioning accuracy 0.1~5.0 0.5 ☆ × × × × × ×

J4.03. peristaltic

frequency

use peristaltic revising speed

when the principle positioning

is inaccurate

0.10~

10.00 0.5 ○ × × × × × ×

J4.04. number of

equal amount

number of equal amount used

in scale division 1~32 1 ○ × × × × × ×

J4.05. Proportion factor The proportion of Motor axis

and wheel axis

1.000~9.9

99 1 ☆ × × × × × ×

J4.06

Chief axis location

adjustment

chooses(Shan PG

way)

0:phase Z

1:X9 0,1 0 ☆ × × ○ ○ ○ ○

J4.07 Search for speed %

1 1~50 10 ☆ × × ○ ○ ○ ○

J4.08 Search for speed %

2 1~50 10 ☆ × × ○ ○ ○ ○

J4.09 Search for speed %

3 1~50 10 ☆ × × ○ ○ ○ ○

J4.10 Search for speed %

4

When adopt pair of PG to

control allocation, way choice

searches for speed , takes

fixed frequency as 100% from

the combination that

multifunctional input end son

interposes 1~50 10 ☆ × × ○ ○ ○ ○

J4.11

Chief axis

allocation signal

choice way

0: Use the energy and chief

axis allocation terminal

1: Chief axis allocation

terminal

0,1 0 ☆ × × ○ ○ ○ ○

Page 86: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Parameter Tables

4-34

L: Parameter of Protection Function

In protection parameter(L parameter), overload protection,overheating protection, over torque protection, speed protection, open-phase protection and PG protection etc. can be set

L1. Motor Overload Protection The following are motor over load protection parameters.

control mode

Parame

-ter

NO.

Name

content

settin

g

range

factory

setting

storage

method V/F

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

magnetic

flux

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

Synchr

-onous

PG

magnetic

flux

non-

Synchr

-Onous

PG

vector

Parame

-ter

page.

L1.01. Motor overload

protection function

Action selecting of overload

0: invalid

1: free slide for stop

2: deceleration-stop

3: abnormal deceleration-stop

4: warning

0,1,2,3,

4 1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

L1.02. Protection time

for motor overload

Set 150% overload detecting time

with unit minutes

0.1~10.

0 1.0min ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

L1.03. Protection mode

for motor overheating

Action selecting

of overheating

0: invalid

1: free slide for stop

2: deceleration-stop

3: abnormal deceleration-stop

4: warning

0,1,2,3,

4 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

L1.04. Protection time

for motor overheating

Set overheating detecting

time with unit second 1~200 10 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

L1.05. Protection temperature

for motor overheating

The temperature

for motor overheating 50~255 105 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

L1.06

The electric motor

measures the

temperature Electric

resistance type

0: PTC 1: Electric resistance 1

2: Electric resistance 2

3: Electric resistance 3

0,1,2,3 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Page 87: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Parameter Tables

4-35

L2. Overheating Protection of Drive The following are overheating parameters of drive

control mode

Parameter

NO.

Name

content setting

range

factory

setting

storage

method V/F

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

magnetic

flux

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

Synchr

-onous

PG

magnetic

flux

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

Parame

-ter

page.

L2.01. Overheating protection

function of heat sink

Action selection of overheating:

0: invalid

1: free slide for stop

2: deceleration-stop

3: abnormal deceleration-stop

4: warning

0,1,2,3,4 1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

L2.02.

Overheating protection

temperatureof heat

sink

Set the overheating protection

temperature with unit℃ 50~120 85℃ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

L2.03.

Overheating protection

time of heat sink

Set overheating protection time

of heat sink with unit minute

1~250 10S ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

L2.04 The temperature of

the he electric fan stops

Run the valve value temperature

that the electric fan closes after

stopping

20~100 45℃ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

L3.Over Torque Protection The following are over torque protection parameters.

control mode

Parameter

NO.

Name

content setting

range

factory

setting

storage

method V/F

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

magnetic

flux

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

Synchr

-onous

PG

magnetic

flux

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

Parame

-ter

page

L3.01. Function of over

torque protection

Action selection of over torque

0: invalid

1: valid

0,1 1 ○ × × ○ ○ ○ ○

L3.02. Threshold value of

over torque protection

set threshold value of over

torque protection with

unit% while vector control

0.0~

300.0%150% ○ × × ○ ○ ○ ○

L3.03. Detection time of

over torque protection

set detection time of over torque

protection with unit second

0.1~

25.0S1.0S ○ × × ○ ○ ○ ○

Page 88: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Parameter Tables

4-36

L4. Speed Protection

The followings are speed protection parameters

control mode

Parameter

NO.

Name

content setting

range

factory

setting

storage

method V/F

non-

Synchr

-Onous

PG

vector

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

magnetic

flux

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

Synchr

-onous

PG

magnetic

flux

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

Parame

-ter

page

L4.01.

Function of Over

speed deviation

protection

Action selection of

Over speed deviation:

0: invalid

1: valid

0,1 1 ○ × × ○ ○ ○ ○

L4.02. thresholdprotection of

over speed deviation

Set threshold protection of

over speed deviation between

feedback speed and instruction

with unit %. The highest

Frequency is set as 100%

1~50 10% ○ × × ○ ○ ○ ○

L4.03. protection time of

over speed deviation

Set protection time of

over speed deviation

with unit second

0.01~

2.50 0.50S ○ × × ○ ○ ○ ○

L4.04. Over speed protection

Action selection of

motor’s over speed

0: invalid

1: valid

0,1 1 ○ × × ○ ○ ○ ○

L4.05.

Threshold value of

over speed protection

Set threshold value of over

speed protection with unit %.

The highest frequency is

set as 100%

1~120 105% ○ × × ○ ○ ○ ○

L4.06. time protection of over

speed

Set time protection of

over speed with unit second

0.01~

2.50 0.5 ○ × × ○ ○ ○ ○

L4.07.

Stall proof

function

in Acceleration

0:invalid

1:valid(exceed value of L40,

stop acceleration 。Reaccel

erate when current

recovered)Install

proof function of motor

acceleration

0,1 0 ○ × × ○ ○ ○ ○

L4.08.

Threshold of Stall

protecting in

acceleration

Set stall protecting function with

unit %. Take rating current of

drive as 100%.

50~200 150% ○ × × ○ ○ ○ ○

Page 89: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Parameter Tables

4-37

control mode

Parameter

NO.

Name

content

setting

range

factory

setting

storage

method V/F

non-

synchr

-onous

PG

vector

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

magnetic

flux

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

Synchr

-onous

PG

magnetic

flux

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

Parame

-ter

page.

L4.09.

limit of

Stall protecting

in acceleration

set stall protecting function with

unit%. Take rating current of the

drive as 100%

0~100 50% ○ × × ○ ○ ○ ○

L4.10. stall protecting in

stable speed

stall protecting in stable speed

of drive:

0: invalid

1:valid

0,1 0 ○ × × ○ ○ ○ ○

L4.11.

stall protection

threshold in

stable speed

set stall protection function

with unit%.Take the rating

current of the drive as 100%

50~200 160% ○ × × ○ ○ ○ ○

L4.12.

stall protection

functiingin

deceleration

stall protecting of motor function

in deceleration

0: invalid

1:valid(once the voltage of main

loop exceeded threshold value,

stop decelerating, accelerate

after the voltage come back),

after the setting of valid,

the braking unit of the drive

will stop working.

0,1 0 ○ × × ○ ○ ○ ○

Page 90: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Parameter Tables

4-38

L5. PG Protection The followings are parameters of PG protection.

control mode

Parameter

NO.

Name

content setting

range

factory

setting

storage

method V/F

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

magnetic

flux

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

Synchr

-onous

PG

magnetic

flux

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

Param

-eter

page

L5.01. PG protecting function

of PG disconnection

0: invalid

1: valid 0,1 1 ○ × × ○ ○ ○ ○

L5.02. wrong phase protection 0: invalid

1: valid 0,1 0 ○ × × ○ ○ ○ ○

L5.03. protection function

of Phase Z rectifying 0,1,2,3,4 0 ○ × × ○ ○ ○ ○

L5.04. Error range of phase

Z correcting

When error pulse reached

threshold value, the drive wil

carry on phase Z wrong correcting

protection(show JE)

10~9999 100 ☆ × × ○ ○ ○ ○

L5.05. Protecting action time

for Phase Z rectifying 0.1~25.0 5.0S ○ × × ○ ○ ○ ○

L5.06. solution for inaccurate

positioning

0: no handling

1: power off

2: rectify without time limit

0~2 0 ○ × × ○ ○ ○ ○

L5.07. permitted time for

peristalsis correction

inaccurate time for principal axis

positioning, use peristalsis

frequency to correct permitted

time

0.0~25.0 1.0S ○ × × ○ ○ ○ ○

L5.08. correcting abnorma

l handling mode

0: no handling

1: power off

2:urgent stop

3:correct again after positioning

0~3 0 ○ × × ○ ○ ○ ○

Page 91: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Parameter Tables

4-39

L6. Phase Missing Protection The following are phase missing protection parameters.

control mode

Parameter

NO.

Name

content setting

range

factory

setting

storage

method V/F

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

magnetic

flux

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

Synchr

-onous

PG

magnetic

flux

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

Param

-eter

page

L6.01. input phase missing

function

input phase missing function

of the drive

0:invalid

1:valid

0,1 1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

L6.02. input voltage threthold

of phase missing

input voltage threthold of

phase missing with unit V 1~100 20V ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

L6.03.

output protecting

function of phase

missing

output protecting function

of phase missing of drive

0: invalid

1: valid

0,1 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

L6.04.

output protecting

function of phase

missing during start

output protecting function

of phase missing during start

0: invalid

1: valid

0,1 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Page 92: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Parameter Tables

4-40

O: parameter of Manipulator

In operationg parameter(0 parameter), press key function, monitoring items etc.can be set.

O2. Selection of Commonly Used Monitoring Items The following are selection parameters of commonly used monitoring items.

control mode

Parameter

NO.

Name

content setting

range

factory

setting

storage

method V/F

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

Magnetic

flux

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

Synchr

-onous

PG

magnetic

flux

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

Param

-eter

page

O2.01.

Setup of commonly

used monitering item 1

Select the monitoring content

of commonly used item 1 0~15 1 ○ × × × × × ×

O2.02. Setup of commonly

used monitering item 2

Select the monitoring content

of commonly used item2 0~15 2 ○ × × × × × ×

O2.03. Setup of commonly

used monitering item3

Select the monitoring content

of commonly used item 3 0~15 5 ○ × × × × × ×

O2.04. selection of

frequency unit

Set the unit of

frequency instruction 0~39999 0 ☆ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

O2.05. U2.06 slection

of displayed content

0: PG input pulse value

1: motor angle 0、1 0 ☆ × × ○ ○ ○ ○

O2.06. U2.08 slection

of displayed content

0: input pulse value

1: motor angle 0、1 0 ☆ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

O2.07

Step-by-step counting

power down protects

choice

0: invalid

1: valid 0,1 0 ☆ × × ○ ○ ○ ○

O3. Internal test Function

Page 93: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Parameter Tables

4-41

Parametric Initial Value Variation of Drive Capacity(A1.01)

The following parameters with different drive capacities(A1.01) have corresponding

initial value.

Capacity

A1.01

carrier

frequency

A2.01

nominal

output

powerE2.01.

nominal

output

current

E2.03.

nominal

output

voltage

E2.04.

noload

current

E2.07.

Nominal

speed

dropE2.08.

Primary side

resistor

E2.09.

45P5 8.0 5.50 13.30 360 6.10 1.60 1.60

47P5 8.0 7.50 19.50 360 9.50 1.60 1.15

4011 8.0 11.0 24.5 360 10.5 1.50 0.922

4015 8.0 15.0 32.0 360 14.5 1.50 0.550

4018 8.0 18.5 38.4 360 16.5 1.50 0.403

4022 6.0 22.0 48.0 360 20.5 1.50 0.316

4030 6.0 30.0 52.3 360 10.9 1.33 0.269

4037 5.0 37.0 65.6 360 19.1 1.33 0.155

4045 5.0 45.0 79.7 360 22.0 1.33 0.122

Page 94: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Parameter Tables

4-42

■Code of Multifunctional Terminal By setting parameters H1 and H2, the functions of multifunctional input terminals X3~X9 and output terminals Y1-YC、Y2-YC、M1-M2 can be set.

Function Table of Multifunctional Input Terminal

Set value function Introduction reference

page

0 not used please do not set

1 instruction of multispeed range1 Can only be used for X3 , direct 1 multispeedly paragraph

2 instruction of multispeed range 2 Must direct 1 for multispeed Duan former one end son being able to only be used for X4

3 instruction of multispeed range3 Must direct 2 for multispeed Duan former one end son being able to only be used for X5

4 instruction of multispeed range4 Must direct 3 for multispeed Duan former one end son being able to only be used for X6

5 instruction of multispeed range5 Must direct 4 for multispeed Duan former one end son being able to only be used for X7

6 inching instruction inching instruction are superior to all other frequency source

7 UP instruction Next terminal must be DOWN instruction

8 DOWN instruction Last terminal must be UP instruction

9 Three lineOperating instruction The function of terminal X1,X2 is three line instruction(corotate/reverse)

10 abnormal stop ON Deceleration-stop as abnormal deceleration time C.1.09 when ON

11 abnormal stop OFF Deceleration-stop as abnormal deceleration time C.1.09 when OFF

12 acceleration and deceleration stop Can not there be 5 6 interposed at the same time

13 Constitute 2/ B1 directing

14 Constitute 2/ B2 directing 13, 14 must interpose at the same time

15 torque limit please do not set

16 analog given selection please do not set

17 Analog given lock/maintain please do not set

18 Speed/torque selection Time ON, torque moment controls

19 Zero servo instruction Make moter kept in zero servo state when ON

20 Counting resets

21 Malfunction reset set malfunction reset of drive when rising edge of ON

22 Forward direction restricts Forbid being rotating when OFF

23 Opposite direction restrict Forbid rolling back when OFF

24 Base electrode blockage ON while ON, block base electrode

25 Base electrode blockage OFF While OFF, block base electrode

26 Forward direction moves

27 Inverted point moves

Corresponding multiple functions of on imports a terminal , imports working instruction

unnecessarily , can let drive move frequency according to (D1.09.) Be rotating/ reverse

urn operation inching instruction are superior to all other frequency source

28 Direct-current braking

29 Priciple axis positioning priciple axis positioning while on

30 Speed / Location control Location control while on

31 Gain changes the speed under the control of

simulating amounts by all means

32~47 Outside malfunction

48~ Expand a function

Page 95: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Parameter Tables

4-43

Function Table of Multifunctional Output Terminal The following are function Table of multifunctional output terminals.

Set Value Function Explanation Reference

Page

0 not used please do not set -

1 in operating 1 ON: in the state of running -

2 zero speed ON: zero speed

3 consistent of frequency ON: testing amplitude J1.03.

4 Randam frequency consistent ON: output frequency=±J1.02., testing amplitude J1.03.

5 checking out> Frequency ON: output frequency≥output frequency≥±J1.02., Testing amplitude J1.03

6 checking out<frequency ON: output frequency≥+J1.02. or output frequency≤±J1.02.,

Testing amplitude J1.03

-

-

7 ready -

8 band type brake control

Drive Ready

Decide on ON/OFF of band type brake control signal according to operation sequece

9 decelerating ON: decelerating -

10 reversing ON: reversing -

11 Output of timer Set together with input of H1.□□ timer -

12 regeneration state ON: regeneration state -

13 ITorque limit ON: torque limit(current flow limit )

14 speed limit ON: speed limit

-

-

15 Checking out of over torque ON: over torque -

16 In operating (ON: while frequency output; OFF: base electrode block, DC braking, operation-stop) -

17 The base electrode blockades middle ON ON: Drive is in base electrode blockage state middle

18 The base electrode blockades middle OFF OFF: Drive is in base electrode blockage state middle

19 The warning being overburdened heralds an

electric motor ON: The electric motor is overburdened

20 The warning being overburdened heralds

drive ON: The drive is overburdened

21 Instruction loses middle ON: Instruction is lost

22 Among zero servoes/ zero locks middle ON: Among zero servoes/ zero locks

23 Contactor controls output ON: Export contactor action

24 Positioning direction achieve

ON: Servo state is hit by drive in zero , the frequency outputing is lower than zero fast

valve value frequency (J1.01) , the location fixing position conforms to chief axis

allocation angle (J4.01) setting up in allocation accuracy range (J4.02)

25 Location is approached

26

27

28

29

30

31

32 Expand the choice outputing

Page 96: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Alarm and Examination This chapter is about the content of alarm display and its countermeasure; the content of motor malfunction alarm and corresponding solutions.

■Protecting and Examining Function........................ 5-1

■Alarm and Malfunction Analysis........................... 5-9

5

Page 97: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

CH5 Alarm and examination

5-1

■ Protecting and Examining Function

Explain the alarm function of drive. Drive will actuate the malfunction connecting point, cut off output and slip the motor till stop.

Alarm Detecting When malfunction occurs, please find out the reason in reference to the tables and take proper actions. Before restart, use the following method to reset the malfunction. ● Set one of the parameters of H1.01.~H1.07.(function selection of multifunctional input terminal)

as21(malfunction reset) and set the signal ON. ● Press “ENTER”key of the digital manipulator to cancel the alarm, then press “STOP” key to restart the drive. ● Disconnect the main loop power source before connect again.

Table 5.1 Alarm Display and Countermeasures

Alarm Display Content Reason

Over Current in Speed Changing of Drive

During acceleration and deceleration, the output

current exceeds the threshold (about 200% rated

current)

overload and too short time for acceleration and

deceleration

used special motor or the motor exceeded maximal power

output side of the motor was short circuited and earthed

over current in stable speed of drive

During the state of stable speed, output current

exceeds the threshold (about 200% rated

current)

overload

used special motor or the motor exceeded maximal power

output side of the motor was short circuited and earthed

over current or overheated of drive

module

output current exceeds the threshold (about

200% rated current)

overload

used special motor or the motor exceeded maximal power

IPM module of the drive is damaged

overload of motor

electronical thermal protection resulted in the

action of overload protection

overload and too short time for acceleration and

deceleration

incorrect setting of V/F curve

incorrect setting of rated current

over torque

overload and too short time for acceleration and

deceleration

incorrect setting of motor parameter

incorrect setting of over torque protection

Overload of drive Overload of drive

Over voltage of main loop during

decelerating

Main loop voltage exceeds threshold value

400V class:770V

Over voltage of power source

Short decelerating time, large amount of regenerative

power

Page 98: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

CH5 Alarm and examination

5-2

Alarm Display Content Reason

Over voltage of main loop in stable speed

Main loop DC voltage exceeds threshold

400Vclass:770V

Over voltage of power source

Over regenerative power

Abnormal voltage of main loop during

motor stop

Main loop DC voltage exceeds threshold

400Vclass:770V

Power source voltage exceeds operating range of drive

Low voltage of main loop during motor

stop

Main loop DC voltage lower than threshold

value during motor stop

400Vclass:420V

power off in transient state

Wiring connection of input power source loose

Low voltage of main loop during motor

operating

Main loop DC voltage lower than threshold

value during motor stop

400Vclass:420V

power off in transient state

over voltage fluctuation of input power source

Wiring connection of input power source loose

Lack of phase of Input power source

Overheating of heat sink

temperature of drive heat sink exceeds

the setting value or 105℃

Over high environment temperature

Heating element around

Stop running of heating fan

Blocking of Heat sink

Other overheating Overheating of charged resistance

Failure of heating fan

External overheating (motor, braking resistance,

etc. Testing circuit should be added)

Disconnection or loose contact of main contactor

Motor overheating

Over speed

Motor speed exceeds the setting value of L4.05

and keeps above time of L4.06

Over high instruction speed

Over deviation of speed control

The improper setting value of L4.05. and L4.06.

Over deviation of speed

Motor speed exceeds the setting value of

L4.02. and keeps above time of L4.03

Overload

too short time for acceleration and deceleration

Improper setting value of load locking state

PG disconnection

Frequency output instruction exits while

no PG pulse signal received

PG disconnection

Incorrect PG connection

No power supplied to PG

Incorrect voltage setting of PG

Incorrect PG phase

Drive send the co-rotating signal but received

reversed torque(or drive send reversing signal

but received positive toque )

Inconsistence of PG phase sequence and motor phase

sequence

Page 99: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

CH5 Alarm and examination

5-3

Alarm Display Content Reason

Incorrect self-checking

UVW phases are not checked out in PG

self-checking

Incorrect self-checking

Input phase lacking

Main loop

Transient power off

Over voltage fluctuation of input power source

Wiring connection of input power source loose

Phase lacking of input power source

Filter capacitor degradation

Output phase lacking

lack of phase at output side of drive

Disconnection of output cable

Disconnection of motor winding

loose of output terminal

Abnormal braking

Abnormal braking loop

Self-checking malfunction of current

mutual inductor

effected by strong interfere

disconnection of motor

Main board Malfunction 1 Over time reset(Crash)

Main board Malfunction 2 EEPROM error of read out efficacy/ write in malfunction

Main board Malfunction 3 Frequency division CPU communication error

Abnormal expanding card abnormal of expanding card self-checking

External abnormity

Set multifunctional input terminals( X3~X8) as 20 and

connect them

Input simultaneously the co-rotating and

reversing instruction

Input simultaneously the co-rotating and reversing

instruction for over 0.5 second.

urgent stop During the period of the terminal works, hand movement

breaks off operation according to

Page 100: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

CH5 Alarm and examination

5-4

Alarm Display Content Reason

Phase Z correctiing Abnormity no phase Z signal

phase Z signal is interfered

incorrect setting of encoder wire number and motor pole

number

Motor self-learning failure Assistant code is display in parameter U4.16., please look

up to table 7.2 for detailed info

Positioning Inaccuracy Too short time for positioning decelerating

Too low setting peristaltic frequency

Too short allowed time for peristaltic revising

Self-checking of Expanding card error

does not check out expanding card with

record of expanding card

H7.01. does not connect expanding card with record of

expanding card

H7.01. plug loosed with record of expanding card

Malfunction of communication

drive can not communicate with external

Malfunction of operator

operator can not communicate with

mainboard

loose contact of operator

Program error

Abnormal pulse fluctuation of encoder

encoder is interfered or improper installed

Expand program error Details sees the explanation expanding a pattern's

Expand program error Details sees the explanation expanding a pattern's

Expand program error Details sees the explanation expanding a pattern's

Over ranged of parameter setting The write-in or software edition of host stiff changes

illegal EEPROM

Improper parameters

Assistant info please look up to U4.16.

Assistant code showed in parameter U4.16., detailed info

please look up to table 7.3

Terminal setting conflict

Assistant info please look up to U4.16.

Assistant code showed in parameter U4.16., detailed info

please look up to table 7.4

Page 101: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

CH5 Alarm and examination

5-5

Alarm Display Content Reason

Error of V/F curve setting Not reply with D2.01.≥E2.01.>E2.03. ≥E2.05.

Not reply with E2.02.>E2.04. ≥E2.06.

The parameter is not INIT New host stiff without detecting

The multifunctional terminal function

interposes conflict

Regulation does not interpose a parameter or the input end

son function does not repeat according to multifunctional

terminal interposition

The function simulating a terminal

interposes conflict

A simulation entering amounts are recommended quilt

being a function more

Expand a parameter surpassing range

Change the parameter expanding a pattern arousing

expansion surpassing range

Expand a parameter interposing a mistake

Outside operation mistake

Assist code to demonstrate when giving an alarm in drive,

or assist information (U4.15.) Middle , detailed information

are consulted expressing 5.5, please

Operation implement inner parameter

content makes mistakes

The content of Operation is empty

The content of Operation is half-baked

Error when edit parameter of operator Carry out function of writing parameter set during motor

operation

Page 102: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

CH5 Alarm and examination

5-6

.PG Self check up mistake What the following shows is that PG assists code (parameter U4.15 time self check up mistake.

Demonstrate the value) analysis.

Table 5.2 PG Self inspects up wrong warning (corresponding auxiliary code or parameter U4.15.)

Auxiliary code (U4.15

time drive warning.

Demonstrate numerical

value)

Content

1 UVW electrical level is abnormal2 Wrong coder communication/ disconnection 3 Coder data abnormal 4 PG card communication is abnormal

. Failure of Motor Self-learning

The following indicate the assistant parameter U4.15.and its explanation when the self-learning of the motor failed.

Table 5.2 Alarm in self-learning (according to parameterU4.15)

U4.16.displayed value

(Assistant info in alarming) Content

1 Can not reach testing current-disconnection of motor, parameter setting error

2 Unreasonable testing result

3 Can not reach testing motor speed-overload of motor axis of rotation, parameter setting

error, incorrect number of encoder wires

4 Incorrect encoder phase

5 No signals of phase Z

6 Incorrect electrical level of phase Z

7 The electric motor does not rotate (electric motor or coder disconnection)

8 Phase is wrong

9 Inconformity or coder be wrong in line number in the coder pole number and the electric

Page 103: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

CH5 Alarm and examination

5-7

. Outside operation mistake What the following shows is that the outside assists code (parameter U4.15 time operation mistake.

Demonstrate the value) analysis。

Table 5.3 Outside malfunction warning (corresponding auxiliary code or parameter U4.15.)

Auxiliary code (U4.15

time drive warning.

Demonstrate numerical

value)

Content

1 The scale division terminal imports Surpass range when Scale division fixes position2 When pair of PG fix position, the electric motor coder and chief axis coder direction

. Unreasonable Parameters

The following indicate the assistant parameter U4.16.and its explanation when the parameters are unreasonable.

Table 5.4 Alarm of Unreasonable Parameters(According to parameter U4.16.)

U4.16.Displayed Value

(Assistant info in alarming) Content

1 Upper limit D2.02. is smaller than lower limitD2.03.

2 Undefined capacitor code A1.01.

3 No-load motor currentE2.07 is larger than rated motor currentE2.03.

4 No-load motor currentE2.07 is larger than 60% of maximal output current.

5 First line resistance E2.09. smaller than reasonable value

6 Unreasonable first line resistance of motor E2.09.-rated current E2.03. * phase

current>rated voltage E2.04.

7

Unreasonable power factor calculation of motor. Related parameters: rated power E2.01.,

rated current E2.03., first line resistance E2.09. and iron loss of motor in torque

compensation E2.11.

8 Too small no-load current

9 Using unauthorized motor control mode

10 Position conflict of electronic cam

11 Pattern code error 1(speed instruction)

12 Pattern code error 2(position instruction)

13 Pattern code error 3(PID instruction)

14 Incorrect definition of electronic cam

15 Incorrect definition of communication interface

16 Wire number of encoder does not satisfy the command of phase Z correction

17 Pulse input can not be input as PID Bias

18 auto lubricating stop time of escalator mode is longer than the period

19 lower limit of pressure relief is larger than upper limit

20 Illegal programmed pattern value

21 Do not interpose the three-way system pattern under the pattern fixing position

22 Illegal coder type

Page 104: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

CH5 Alarm and examination

5-8

. Terminal Setting Conflict

The following indicate the assistant parameter U4.16.and its explanation when terminal setting conflict.

Table5.5 Alarm of Terminal Setting Conflict (According to parameter U4.16.)

U4.16.Displayed Value

(Assistant info in alarming) Content

1 Combination instruction 1/ B1 is not set at X3

2 Combination instruction 1/ B2 is not set at X4

3 With Combination instruction 1/ B2, without B1

4 Combination instruction 1/ B3 is not set at X5

5 With Combination instruction 1/ B3, without B1 OR B2

6 Combination instruction 1/ B4 is not set at X6

7 With Combination instruction 1/ B4, without B1 or B2 or B3

8 Combination instruction 1/ B5 is not set at X7

9 With Combination instruction 1/ B4, without B1 or B2 or B3 or B4

10 Combination instruction 2/ B1 is set at X10

11 With Combination instruction 2/ B1, without Combination instruction 2/ B2

12 UP terminal is set at X8

13 With terminal up, without terminal down

14 Gain setting value of analog interface#1 is smaller than bias setting value

15 Gain setting value of analog interface#2 is smaller than bias setting value

16 Gain setting value of analog interface#3 is smaller than bias setting value

17 RP gain setting value is smaller than Bias setting value

18 Setting conflict at analog interface#1

19 Setting conflict at analog interface#2

20 Setting conflict at analog interface#3

21

22 Setting correction switch conflict with X9 definition under positioning mode

23 Using main axis positioning function ,without setting phase Z correction function

24 Using close loop vector control mode , without installing PG card

25 Moment of torsion directs AUX to be able to not be put into use at the same time with starting

26 The gear wheel ratio sets up an electron surpassing range

44 Entire vector under the control of pattern does not deploy the corresponding PG card

Page 105: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

CH5 Alarm and examination

5-9

■Alarm and Malfunction Analysis When the system is started, drive and motor may not operate according to the setting because of the failure of parameter setting and wiring connection. Refer to this section to deal with them properly. Look up to “Protecting and Examining Function” if malfunction content is displayed.

Can Not Set Parameters Implement the following approaches if drive parameters can not be set.

Display does not change when press and .

Consider the following reasons.

Drive is operating. Some parameters can not be set when drive is running. Please stop the drive before setting parameters.

Inconsistent code (only when setting code) When drive starts, code OP1, OP2, OP7 is set. But if it is not encoded or the encoding is wrong, the related system parameter will be unchanged. Then enter the right code to declassify. When you forget the code, please ask suppliers for the universal code to declassify.

Display .or . Alarm

Abnormal parameter setting, please refer to “Protecting and Examining Function” to revise.

Display alarm

Communication malfunction of digit manipulator, the connection malfunction is between digit manipulator and drive. Please dismount and reconnect the plug.

Page 106: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

CH5 Alarm and examination

5-10

Motor Does Not Rotate

Implement the following approaches if motor does not rotate.

Motor Does Not Rotate When Press in the Operator

The following reasons should be considered.

Set Mode of the Operating Instruction Is Wrong

When B1.01. (operating instruction selection) are set as 1 or 2, press , the motor can not rotate.

Please set parameter B1.01.=0(manipulator).

Too Low frequency Instruction When set B1.06.( action of selecting output frequency lower than minimum) as 1 or 3 and the frequency instruction proportion J1.01.(zero speed threshold frequency) is low, the drive can not operating. Please change the parameter as B1.06.=0 or 2 according to the situation, or set frequency instruction above zero speed threshold.

Malfunction of Multifunctional Analog Value Input Setting

Please make sure the set value of B1.04.(selection of frequency instruction), B1.05.(set mode of analog instruction), H3, D2 and analog input state are matching.

Motor Does Not Rotate when Input External Operating Signal The following reasons should be considered.

Not in the Ready State

The drive is not in the ready state, press in the manipulator to set the drive into the ready state

(indicating lamp turns green color at left top side of key)

Set Mode of the Operating Instruction Is Wrong

When B1.01.(operating instruction select) are set as 0 or 2, the motor does not rotate even input

external operating signal. Please set parameter B1.01.=1(external terminal control).

Page 107: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

CH5 Alarm and examination

5-11

Sequent State of Three-wire System Input mode is different between two-wire sequence (operating as co-rotating/stop, reversing/stop) and three-wire sequence. When setting three-wire sequence, motor will operate even set ON at the terminals which are equivalent to co-rotating/stop and reversing/stop. When operate as three-wire sequence, input corresponding signal after confirming the timing sequence diagram of three-wire sequence. When operate as two-wire sequence, set parameters H1.01.~H1.07.(functional selection of multifunctional input terminal X3~X9 ) as values except 9.

Too Low Frequency Instruction When set B1.06.( action of selecting output frequency lower than minimum) as 1 or 3 and he frequency instruction proportion J1.01.(zero speed threshold frequency) is low, the drive can not operating. Please change the parameter as B1.06.=0 or 2 according to the situation, or set frequency instruction above zero speed threshold.

Malfunction of Multifunctional Analog Value Input Setting

Please make sure the set value of B1.04.(selection of frequency instruction), B1.05.(set mode of analog instruction), H3.**.,D2.**. and analog input state are matching.

Motor Stop during Accelerating and Load Connecting Overloaded, the drive has the function of stall proof and auto torque increasing. Too large acceleration and load will exceed the reply limit of motor. Please increase accelerating time(C1.01.,C1.03.,C1.05.,C1.07.) and reduce load. In addition, please consider enlarging the capacity of the drive and motor.

Motor rotate towards only One Direction When drive is set B1.07.=1(prohibit reversing), the drive will not accept reversing instruction. Please set B1.07.=0(allow reversing)when need the use of co-rotating/reversing.

Inversed Direction of Rotation Inversed direction of rotation is resulted by wrong wiring connection. Motor will co-rotate when received the co-rotating instruction if phase U, V, W of drive and motor are connected correctly. The direction of co-rotation is decided by the manufacturer and type. So please confirm the motor

specification and switch every two of U, V, W phase if the direction is inversed. If use to control

motor operation, the direction can also be switched by setting parameter O1.02. (function of operation key).

Page 108: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

CH5 Alarm and examination

5-12

Motor does not output torque/Too Long Accelerating time Implement the following solution when motor does not output torque or accelerating time is too long .

Restrain the Output Torque After setting parameter E5.10.and E.11.(upper limit of torque), the torque above the upper limit can not be output, then result in not enough torque, and the accelerating time will become long. Make sure the torque limit is set properly. When set parameter E5.12 (source of upper limit) as 1 or 2, please check if the corresponding analog value is proper.

Too Low Stall Proof Threshold during Accelerating The set value of parameter L4.08.(Stall proof threshold during accelerating) is too low which will result in longer accelerating time. Make sure the set value is proper.

Too low Stall proof Threshold of Stable Speed The set value of parameter L4.10.(stall proof threshold of stable speed) is too low which will result in speed down before output torque. Make sure the set value is proper. .

Using Vector Control, Self-learning Not Implemented When self-learning is not implemented, the performance of vector control will not be achieved. Please implement self-learning or set motor parameters according to calculation. The implementation of self-learning mode please refer to chapter 4 “Trail running”.

Motor Rotation exceeds Frequency Instruction Implement the following solutions when motor rotation exceeds frequency instruction.

Gain or Bias Setting of analog value frequency instruction Are

Abnormal

Please make sure the set value of H3. **.(input gain and bias of analog input terminal) is proper.

Abnormal Input Signal of Frequency Instruction Terminal Please make sure the set value of B1.04.(selection of frequency instruction),B1.05.(set mode of analog instruction),H3.**.,D2.** and corresponding analog input value of the interface are proper.

Page 109: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

CH5 Alarm and examination

5-13

Too Low Accuracy of Speed Control in Slip Compensation

Function

When the accuracy of speed control in slip compensation function is too low, the limit of the compensation has been reached. In slip compensation function, other compensation except E2.12.、E2.13.(limit of low and high speed compensation )is not carried on. Please make sure the set values are proper.

Using Sensorless vector control mode, the accuracy of

speed control in high speed rotation is too low, rated

voltage of motor becomes higher.

The maximal output voltage of motor is decided by input voltage. If the calculated result of vector control is that instruction value of output voltage is higher than maximal voltage output value, the speed control accuracy will reduced. Please use the motor of rated voltage value (professional motor for vector control).

Slow Deceleration Speed of Motor Implement the following solutions when the deceleration speed of motor is slow.

The Deceleration Time Is Long Even Use the Connect Braking

Resistance

The following reasons should be considered.

Set Parameter L4.12.(Stall Proof Function in Decelerating)as 1(valid)

When connect braking resistance, please set parameter L4.12.=0(stall proof function in decelerating

is invalid). If it is set as 1(valid), the function of braking resistance will not fully brought out.

Set Too Long Deceleration Time Please make sure the setting of C1.02.、C1.04.、C1.06.and C1.08.(deceleration time) are proper.

Not Enough Torque of Motor When parameter is normal and no motor malfunction happened, the power limit of the motor is

reached. Please consider enlarging the motor capacity.

Page 110: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

CH5 Alarm and examination

5-14

Restrain the Output Torque After setting parameter E5.10.and E.11.(upper limit of torque), the torque above the upper limit can not be output, then result in not enough torque, and the accelerating time will become long. Make sure the torque limit is set properly. When set parameter E5.12 (source of upper limit) as 1 or 2, please check if the corresponding analog value is proper.

Slip Down while Braking with Lifting and Dropping Load It is caused by bad sequence. Drive is in DC braking state in 0.5 second after deceleration over

(factory setting). In order to keep the braking, please set parameter H2.01(function selecting of multifunctional terminals.M1-M2) as 6(frequency checking out<), set the output frequency as OFF when it is above the checking out frequency, set as ON below .( J1.02.is3.0~5.0Hz). Because (Checking out<) lagged the frequency amplitude value(J1.03.=2.0Hz), please change J1.03. as about 0.5Hz. In addition, do not use operating signal 1 of multifunctional connector output as braking ON/OFF signal.

Motor Overheating Implement the following solutions when overheating.

Overloaded When the load of the motor is too heavy, the practical torque exceeds the rated torque and run for a long time which will lead to motor overheating. In the parameter tables, there is short time case besides the continuous rated case. Please reduce the load and prolong the acceleration time. In addition, enlarging the motor capacitor should be considered.

High environment temperature The rated value of motor is decided in the rated environment temperature. When the temperature exceeds the rated value, keeping the running of rated torque will lead to motor damage. Please keep the environment temperature lower than rated value.

Not Enough Withstand Voltage between Motor Phases Connect motor to output terminal of drive, between the switch of drive and motor winding there will be impacting voltage. Usually, the maximal output voltage is 3 times of voltage in input power source of drive. Please use the motor whose withstand voltage between phases are higher than maximal impacting voltage. Drive of 400V class, please use frequency converting purposed motor.

Using Vector Control, Self-learning Not Implemented When self-learning is not implemented, the performance of vector control will not be achieved. Please implement self-learning or set motor parameters according to calculation. The implementation of self-learning mode please refer to chapter 4 “Trail running”.

Page 111: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

CH5 Alarm and examination

5-15

Noise Appears Since the Drive Is Started/ Noise Appears

from AM Radio

Implement the following solutions when the interference is caused by switch of the drive. Turn down the setting of A2.02.(carrier frequency). The effect is cause by reducing the switching

frequency inside. Add input noise filter in input side of voltage power source of motor. Add output noise filter in output side of voltage power source of motor. Cover cables with metal tubes and use metal shield around drive because the radio waves can be

screened by metal shield. Please make sure to earthing the drive body and the motor. Please arrange the wires of the main loop and control loop separately.

Residual Current Circuit Breaker Act once the Drive

Operate

The leakage current is generated because the switching action is inside the drive. Too large leakage current will lead to the action of residual current circuit breaker and cut off the power source. Please change the breaker for higher leakage checking out value (sense current more than 200mA, action time above 0.1s) or the breaker with high frequency countermeasure (frequency converter purposed). Turning down the set value of parameter A2.02.(carrier frequency)will have effect in a certain degree. In addition, the prolonged wire will lead to the increasing of leakage current.

Mechanical Vibration Implement the following solutions when there is mechanical fluctuation.

Resonance of Natural Frequency and Carrier Frequency in Mechanical System No problem exist when motor act separately, but the appeared sharp noise after connection mechanics indicates the resonance of natural frequency and carrier frequency. Please adjust parameter E1.03.(carrier frequency)to avoid resonance frequency.

Resonance of Natural Frequency and drive output Frequency Please adjust the set value of parameter D3.(jump frequency)to avoid resonance frequency, or add vibrating proof rubber in the bottom board of drive.

Vibrating in V/F Control/Oscillation It is caused by ineffective gain adjusting. Adjusting E6.02. (delay time for torque rising)、E5.15.(vibration restrain%)、E6.05. (relay time for slipping compensation)before setting gains of obvious effect. Please reduce gain setting value and increase relay time setting value.

Page 112: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

CH5 Alarm and examination

5-16

Vibration in Sensorless Vector Control Mode/Oscillation Insufficiency gain is adjusted. Adjust parameter E6.02 according to order please. (Delay time that revolution regulation lifting). Adjust parameter E6.02 according to order please. (Delay time that revolution regulation lifting) ,E5.14. (When reducing the speed, electric current gain decays %), E5.15. (There be no the sensory vector controlling vibration restrain %), E6.05. (Rotate difference compensating delay time).Again set up effect is big gain, Diminish proportion gain setting value , enhance accumulate points time setting value please.

Vibration in Control of Current and Magnetic Flux/Oscillation It is caused by ineffective gain adjusting. Adjusting E5.15.(vibration restrain%),E5.01.,E5.02., E5.03.(speed proportion gain), E5.04., E5.05., E5.06.(speed integrating time)before setting gains of obvious effect. Please reduce gain setting value and increase relay time and integrating time setting value. When self-learning is not implemented, the performance of vector control will not be achieved. Please implement self-learning or set motor parameters according to calculation. The implementation of self-learning mode please refer to chapter 4 “Trail running”.

Self-learning Is Not Implemented in Vector Control When self-learning is not implemented, the performance of vector control will not be achieved. Please implement self-learning or set motor parameters according to calculation. The implementation of self-learning mode please refer to chapter 4 “Trail running”.

Output Motor Keeps on Rotating after Drive Stop It is caused by ineffective DC braking. Motor does not stop completely. The deceleration-stop and low speed free sliding to stop is caused by ineffective decelerating in DC braking. Adjust DC braking with the following instructions. Increase setting value of parameter B1.09.(DC braking current). Increase setting value of parameter C3.03.(DC braking time when stop).

Can Not Increase Output Frequency to Instruction Frequency Implement the following solutions if the output frequency can not be increased to instruction frequency.

Instruction Frequency in the Range of Jumping Frequency During the use of jumping frequency (D3.**.), if the instruction is in the range of jumping frequency, there will be no change for output frequency. Please make sure the set values of 3.0, D3.02. (jumping frequency)and D3.03.(amplitude of jumping frequency)are proper.

Overpass the Upper Limit of the Frequency The upper limit of the output frequency is D2.01.(highest output frequency ) ×D2.02.(upper limit of frequency)/100. Make sure the set values of parameters D2.01.and D2.02 are proper.

Page 113: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

The second part The AC servo drive debugging instructions

and Appendix

trial operation This section shows the order of the trial operation of the drive and the operating process.

■ The order of the trial operation ................................................................................6-1

■ The operation of the trial operation .........................................................................6-2

■ Adjustment guide ...........................................................................................................6-11

6

Page 114: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

CH6 trial operation

6-1

■ The order of the trial operation Depending on the flow chart shown below to carry out trial operation.

Power connected

When motor cable over 50m or heavy load,motor always stall or

over-load?

*1� For good accuracy,please carry out rotational self-learning (autotuning)when motor can rotate� OP3.=1/2/3�*2� Nothing to do with control mode,please carry out static self-learn when cable is over 50m after installation.*3� The initial control mode is V/f control.� A2.01.=0�*4� Max output frequency is different from basic frequency�please set max output frequency after self-learning.� D2.01.�

Figure 6.1 The process of trial operation

Page 115: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

CH6 trial operation

6-2

■ The operation of the trial operation This section shows the order of trial operation.

Power on Confirm all of the following items and then turn on the power supply. ·Check that the power supply is of the correct voltage?

AC 380~480V 50/60Hz 400 class :3-phase 380v~480V 50/60Hz ·Make sure that the motor output terminals (U, V, W) are connected to the motor correctly.

·Make sure that the Drive control circuit terminals and the control device are wired correctly. · Set all Drive control circuit terminals to OFF. ·When using a Option Card, make sure that it is wired correctly. ·Make sure that the motor is not connected to the mechanical system (no-load status)

Checking the Display Status

If the Digital Operator's display at the time the power is connected is normal, it will read as follows:

Display is different when faulting.Please refer to CH5『Alarm and examination』in Part 1 『L380 Installation ,wiring and parameters list』,and take measures. Shown below when faulting.

Basic Settings About how to use a digital operator,please refer to CH3『Summery of digital operator

and parameters』in Part 1 『L380 Installation ,wiring and parameters list』.Refer to CH4『Parameters』and CH7『Set parameters by function』in Part 1 『L380 Installation ,wiring and parameters list』 for details of parameters. After initialization of motor parameters,please set reasonable parameters as followed。

Page 116: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

CH6 trial operation

6-3

Table 6.1 Set the parameters

◎:Parameters that Must Be Set ○:Set parameters according to application artitio Parameter NO. Name Description Setting range Factory setting

◎ A2.01. Motor control method selection

Set the control method for the Drive. 0: V/f control 1:Sensorless vector control 2:Flux vector control 3:Current vector control 4:Permanent magnet synchronous motor

current vector control 5:Permanent magnet synchronous motor

flux vector control

0~5 0

◎ B1.01. Run commandselection

Set input method of run command 0:operator 1:external terminals control

0~1 1

◎ B1.04. Frequency command selec-tion

Set input method of frequency command 0:operator 1:external terminals control 2:analog(dynamic following) 3:analog(command following) 4:not use 5:torque control

0~5 1

○ B1.03. Stopping method selection

0:Coast to stop 1:Deceleration to stop 2:Deceleration to stop with time

limit 3:Coast to stop with DC rejection 4:DC braking stop

0~4 0

◎ C1.01. Acceleration time 1

Set the acceleration time to accelerate from 0 to the maximum output frequency (seconds)

0.10~600.00 2.50S

◎ C1.02. Deceleration time 1

Set the deceleration time to deceleratefrom the maximum output frequency to 0(seconds)

0.10~600.00 2.50S

○ A2.02. Carrier frequency

The carrier frequency is set low if the motor cable is 50 m or longer, or to reduce radio noise or leak。

2.0~16.0 8.0K

○ D1.01.~D1.08,D1.09.

Frequency command1~8, Jog frequency command

Set the required speed commands for multi-step speed operation or jogging. 0.10~600.00 D1.01.~D1.08.:0.00Hz

D1.09.:6.00Hz

○ D2.01. Maximum output frequency Maximum output frequency of drive 10.00~300.00 50.0Hz

◎ E2.03. Motor ratedcurrent

Set the motor rated current.The value is the reference value for the motor protection.

0.1~500.0 Setting for general-purpose motor of same capacity as Drive

○ L4.12. Stall preventionfunction during deceleration.

Stall prevention function during deceleration of drive 0:invalid 1:effective(stop decelerating when DC voltage level is exceeded. Deceleration starts again when the voltage is normal),the braking unit does not work when set effective.

0,1 0

Page 117: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

CH6 trial operation

6-4

Settings for the Control Methods

Choose appropriate autotuning mode according to control methods

■Overview of Settings

Choose autotuning mode according to the following steps. Note:If the motor cable changes to 50 m or longer for the actual installation, perform stationary autotuning for the line-to-line resistance only on-site. 1、Carry out autotuning. Use rotational autotuning to increase autotuning accuracy whenever it is okay for the motor to be operated.When under sensorless vector control(A2.01.=1),make sure

autotuning is done.

2、The initial value of control mode is V / F control method(A2.01.=0)。

■Choosing control method

There are 6 control methods.

Control methods Parameter setV/F control A2.01.=0

Sensorless vector control A2.01.=1

asynchronism motor flux vector control A2.01.=2

asynchronism motor current vector control A2.01.=3

Permanent magnet synchronization motor current vector control A2.01.=4

Permanent magnet synchronization motor flux vector control A2.01.=5

Note:With vector control, the motor and Drive must be connected 1:1. The motor capacity for which stable control is

possible is 50% to 100% of the capacity of the Drive

V/F control(A2.01.=0)

·Set either one of the fixed patterns in E1(V/f Pattern SelectionⅠ) or set E3 (V/f Pattern Selection II) to specify a user-set pattern as required for the motor and load characteristics .

·Carry out static autotuning for the line-to-line resistance only if the motor cable is 50 m or longer for the actual installation or the load is heavy enough to produce stalling or overload.Please refer to the next page for details about static line-to-line resistance autotuning.

Sensorless vector control(A2.01.=1)

·Carry out autotuning. If the motor can be rotated, make rotational autotuning. If the motor cannot be rotated, make static autotuning.Refer to the next page for details.

asynchronism motor flux vector control (A2.01.=2) asynchronism motor current vector control (A2.01.=3)

·Set H5.**.according to encoder。(encoder input/output)

·Learn motor impedance parameter(static autotuning)

·Carry out autotuning.If the motor can be rotated, make rotational autotuning. If the motor cannot be rotated, make static autotuning.Refer to the next page for details.

Page 118: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

CH6 trial operation

6-5

Permanent magnet synchronization motor current vector control(A2.01.=4)

Permanent magnet synchronization motor flux vector control(A2.01.=5)

·Set H5.**.according to encoder。(encoder input/output)

·Carry out autotuning.Before autotuning,make sure the motor is empty-load,carry out Permanent magnet synchronization motor Pole position rotational autotuning.

Autotuning Use the following procedure to perform autotuning to automatically set motor parameters when using the vector control method, when the cable length is long, etc.

■Choosing Autotuning mode

One of the following four autotuning modes can be set in OP3 ·OP3.=0:static autotuning for line-to-line resistance;

·OP3.=1:static autotuning for line-to-line resistance and motor leak inductance;

·OP3.=2:Rotational autotuning is used for line-to-line resistance ,motor leak inductance and no-load current;

·OP3.=3:Rotational autotuning is used for magnet pole position of permanent magnet synchronization motor. Static autotuning(Line-to-line resistance) (OP3.=0)

Stationary autotuning for line-to-line resistance only can be used in any control method. This is the only auto-tuning possible for sensorless V/f control. Autotuning can be used to prevent control errors when the motor cable is long (50 m or longer) or the cable length has changed since installation or when the motor and Drive have different capacities.

Set A3=0 to 0, and then press the ENTER Key on the Digital Operator. The Drive will supply power to the stationary motor for approximately 20 seconds and the Motor Line-to-Line Resistance will be automatically measured and stored in E2.09

Static autotuning(Line-to-line resistance and motor leak inductance) (OP3.=1)

Static autotuning is used for sensorless vector control, asynchronism motor flux vector control and

asynchronism motor current vector control. Enter motor nameplate data. Set A3=1 , press theENTER

Key on the Digital Operator. The Drive will supply power to the stationary motor for approximately 1 minute and the motor line-to-line resistance (E2.09.) and motor leak inductance (E2.10) will be automatically measured.

Rotational autotuning(line-to-line resistance ,motor leak inductance and no-load current) (OP3.

=2)

Rotational autotuning is used for sensorless vector control, asynchronism motor flux vector control and

asynchronism motor current vector control

Set A3=2, input the data from the nameplate, and then press theENTER

Key on the Digital Operator.

Page 119: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

CH6 trial operation

6-6

The Drive will supply power to the rotational motor for approximately 1 minute and the motor line-to-line resistance (E2.09.), motor leak inductance (E2.10) and no-load current (E2.07) will be automatically measured.

Rotational autotuning(magnet pole position of permanent magnet synchronization motor) (OP3.=3)

Rotational autotuning is used for Permanent magnet synchronization motor current vector control and Permanent

magnet synchronization motor flux vector control

Set A3=3, input the data from the nameplate, and then press theENTER

Key on the Digital Operator.

The Drive will supply power to the rotational motor for approximately 1 minute and the motor magnet pole position (H5.07) will be automatically measured.

■Precautions Before Autotuning

Read the following precautions before using autotuning. ·Autotuning the Drive is fundamentally different from autotuning the servo system. Drive autotuning

automatically adjusts parameters according to detected motor parameters. ·When speed precision or torque precision is required at high speeds (i.e., 90% of the rated speed or

higher), use a motor with a rated voltage that is 20 V less than the input power supply voltage of the Drive for 200~240V-class Drives and 40 V less for 380-480V-class Drives. If the rated voltage of the motor is the same as the input power supply voltage, the voltage output from the Drive will be unstable at high speeds and sufficient performance will not be possible.

·Use static autotuning whenever performing autotuning for a motor that is connected to a load. ·Use rotational autotuning whenever performing autotuning for a motor that has fixed output characteris-

tics, when high precision is required, or for a motor that is not connected to a load. ·If rotational autotuning is performed for a motor connected to a load, the motor parameters will not be

found accurately and the motor may exhibit abnormal operation. Never perform rotational autotuning for a motor connected to a load.

·If the wiring between the Drive and motor changes by 50 m or more between autotuning and motor installation, perform static autotuning for line-to-line resistance only.

·If the motor cable is long (50 m or longer), perform static autotuning for line-to-line resistance only even when using V/f control.

·he status of the multi-function inputs and multi-function outputs will be as shown in the following table during autotuning. When performing autotuning with the motor connected to a load, be sure that the holding brake is not applied during autotuning, especially for conveyor systems or similar equipment.

Tuning mode Multi-function Inputs Multi-function Outputs

Stationary autotuning(Line-to-line resistance) Do not function Maintain same status as when autotuning is started.

Stationary autotuning(Line-to-line resistance and motor leak inductance) Do not function Maintain same status as when autotuning is started.

Rotational autotuning(Line-to-line resistance, motor leak inductance and no-load current) Do not function Same as during normal operation

Rotational autotuning(Magnet pole position of permanent magnet synchronization motor )

Do not function Same as during normal operation

·To cancel autotuning always use theMENUESC Key on the Digital Operator.

Page 120: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

CH6 trial operation

6-7

1、Power will be supplied to the motor when stationary autotuning is performed even though the motor will not

turn. Do not touch the motor until autotuning has been completed.

2、When performing stationary autotuning connected to a conveyor or other machine, ensure that the holding

brake is not activated during autotuning.

■Precautions for Rotational and Static Autotuning

when the rated voltage of the motor is higher than the input voltage of the Drive,Please do not make

the output voltage of the drive reach Saturation ,please lower the rated voltage of

the motor.

1、 Enter the input voltage in E2.04(rated voltage of motor). 2、 Enter the following value in E2.05(rated frequency of motor)

(Base frequency from the motor’s nameplate × setting of E3.04)/(Rated voltage from motor’s nameplate)

3、 Carry out autotuning. After completing autotuning, set the maximum frequency from the motor’s nameplate in D2.01 (Max. output frequency).

Figure 6.2 Settings of motor rated frequency and input voltage of drive

1、When speed precision is required at high speeds (i.e., 90% of the rated speed or higher), set T1-03 (Motor rated voltage)

to the input power supply voltage × 0.9.

2、When operating at high speeds (i.e., 90% of the rated speed or higher), the output current will

increase as the input power supply voltage is reduced. Be sure to provide sufficient margin in

the Drive current.

Importance

Page 121: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

CH6 trial operation

6-8

■Precautions after Rotational and Stationary Autotuning

If the maximum output frequency and base frequency are different, set the maximum output frequency (D2.01) after autotuning.

■Parameter Settings before Autotuning

The following parameters must be set before autotuning.

Table 6.2 Parameter Settings before Autotuning

Control method

Paramete

rs NO.

Name

Description

Setting range

Factorysetting

Data display during

autotuning

V/F

Senso

rl-es

s

vecto

r

contr

ol

Asynchr

o-nism

motor

current

vector

control

Asynch

ro-nis

m motor

flux

vector

contro

l

Permane

nt

magnet

synchro

nizatio

n motor

current

vector

control

Permane

nt

magnet

synchro

nizatio

n motor

flux

vector

control

E2.01. Motor output power

Set the output power of the motorin kilowatts 0.1~200.0 11.0* ○ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎

E2.02. Number of motor poles

Set the number of motor poles. 2~48 4 ☆ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎

E2.03. Motor rated current Set the rated current of the motorin amps 0.1~500.0 24.5A* ○ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎

Motor rated voltage Set the rated voltage of the motor in volts

E2.04. Motor rated voltage

Set the rated voltage of thePermanent magnet synchronizationmotor in volts

1~500 360V* ○ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎

E2.05. Motor base frequency Set the base frequency of the motorin hertz Fe=Ne*P/120 0.00~300.00 50.0Hz ○ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎

E2.06. Motor base speed Set the base speed of the motor inmin−1 1~6000 1450RP

M ○ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎

H5.01. Number of PG pulses Per circle when turn-ing

Set the number of pulses for the PG (pulse generator or encoder). 0~20000 1024 ☆ × × ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎

OP3. Autotuning method

selection

Set the autotuning mode

0: Line-to-line resistance(static)1:Line-to-line resistance and motor leak inductance(static) 2:Line-to-line resistance, motorinductance and no-load current(Rotational) 3:Magnet pole position

0~3 0 ☆ × × × × × ×

1、The factory setting depends on the Drive capacity.

2、For sensorless V/f control, the only setting that is possible is OP3=0(static autotuning for line-to-line resistance only).

3、For fixed output motors, set the base speed value.

4、For drive motors or for specialized vector motors, the voltage or frequency may be lower than for general-purpose

motors. Always confirm the information on the nameplate or in test reports. If the no-load values are known, input

the no-load voltage in E2.04 and the no-load frequency in E2.05 to ensure accuracy.

5、The settings that will ensure stable vector control are between 50% and 100% of the Drive rating.

Note:Refer to chapter 3 for details about Digital Operator displays during autotuning.

Page 122: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

CH6 trial operation

6-9

Application settings User parameters are set as required in system programming mode

Setting Examples

The following are examples of settings for applications ·To prevent the machine from being operated in reverse, set b1 .07 to 1 to disable reverse ·To increase the speed of a 60Hz motor by 10%, set D2.01 to 66.0Hz. ·To use a 0 to 10-V analog signal for a 60Hz motor for variable-speed operation between 0 and 54Hz

(0% to 90% speed deduction), set H3.02 to 90.0%. ·To control speed between 20% and 80% to ensure smooth gear operation and limit the maximum

speed of the machine, set d2.02 to 80.0% and set d2.03 to 20.0%.

No-load Operation

To being no-load operation (without connecting the machine to the motor), use the Digital Operator to set B1.01=0 (Run),B1.04=0(frequency command) . Always confirm safety around the motor and machine before starting Drive operation from the Digital Operator. Confirm that the motor works normally and that no errors are displayed at the Drive.

If the external sequence prevent operation from the Digital Operator, confirm that emergency stop circuits and machine safety mechanisms are functioning.Set B1.01=1,B1.04=2,3.use external terminals to make the drive run. The safety precautions must always be taken before starting the Drive when the motor connected to the machine.

Both a RUN command (forward or reverse) and a frequency reference (or multi-step speed reference) must be

provided to start Drive operation.

Page 123: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

CH6 trial operation

6-10

Loaded Operation

Connect the machine to the motor and then start operation as described for no-load operation (i.e., from the Digital Operator or by using control circuit terminal signals).

■Connecting the Load ·After confirming that the motor has stopped completely, connect the mechanical system. ·Be sure to tighten all the screws when securing the motor shaft to the mechanical system. ·Make sure emergency stop circuit and the machine safe device is working.

■Operation using the Digital Operator ·Use the Digital Operator to start operation in LOCAL mode in the same way as in no-load operation. (set B1.01=0,B1.04=0)

If fault occurs during operation, make sure the STOP Key on the Digital Operator is easily accessible. At first, set the frequency reference to a low speed of one tenth the normal operating speed

■Checking Operating Status

·Having checked that the operating direction is correct and that the machine is operating smoothly at slow speed, increase the frequency reference.

·After changing the frequency reference or the rotation direction, check that there is no oscillation or abnormal sound from the motor. Check the monitor display to ensure that U1.05 (Output Current) is not too high.

·Refer to『Adjustment guide』if hunting ,vibration, or other problems originating in the control system occur.

Access and protect parameter group It is easy to process parameter group of drive:access,encryption,and so on. Refer to Chapter3 for details.

■ Access user’s parameters

Press ENTER

andMENUESC key of digital operator can access user’s parameter access mode. If required,

the copy function in parameters displayed in advanced programming mode can be used to copy the changed settings from the Drive to a recording area in the Digital Operator. If changed settings are saved in the Digital Operator, they can be easily copied back to the Drive to speed up system recovery if for any reason the Drive has to be replaced.

After accessing user’s parameters, both press and key on the digital operator

changes to monitor status.

■Password

There are 3 levels password in the drive. The order is OP1, OP2 and OP7. The lower password can access next level and change more parameters. The parameters con not change when the password is incorrect.

Page 124: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

CH6 trial operation

6-11

■ Adjustment guide

If hunting, vibration, or other problems originating in the control system occur during trial operation, adjust the parameters listed in the following table according to the control method.

This table lists only the most commonly used user parameters.

Table 6.3 adjusted parameters

Control Method

Name (Parameter Number) Performance Factory

Setting Recommend

ed Setting Adjustment Method

Carrier frequency selection(A2.02.)

Reducing motor magnetic noise • Controlling hunting and vibration at low speeds

Depends on

capacity

0 to default

Reduce the setting if torque is insufficient for heavy loads. • Increase the setting if hunting or vibration occurs for light loads.

Middle output frequency voltage (E1.04) , Minimum output frequency voltage (E1.06)

Improving torque at low speeds • Controlling shock at startup

15V;

9V

0.0~

00.0V

Increase the setting if torque is insufficient at low speeds. • Reduce the setting if shock at startup is large.

Hunting prevention %(E5.15.)

Controlling hunting and vibration in middle-range speeds

0

30

Reduce the setting if torque is insufficient for heavy loads. • Increase the setting if hunting or vibration occurs for light loads.

Torque compensation gain (E6.01.)

Improving torque at low speeds (10 Hz or lower) • Controlling hunting and vibration

1.00

0.00~

2.50

Increase the setting if torque is insufficient at low speeds. • Reduce the setting if hunting or vibration occurs for light loads.

Torque compensation primary delay time constant (E6.02.)

Increasing torque and speed response • Controlling hunting and vibration

20ms

0~1000ms

Reduce the setting if torque or speed response is slow. • Increase the setting if hunting or vibration occurs.

Slip compensation gain(E6.03) Improving speed accuracy 0

0

Set 1 when the speed is not stable for

heavy loads; Set 0 if hunting or

vibration occurs for light loads.

V/F

control

(A2.01

.=0)

Slip compensation primary delay time (E6.05)

Increasing speed response • Improving speed stability

200ms

10~

10000ms

Reduce the setting if speed response is slow. • Increase the setting if the speed is not stable.

Carrier frequency selection(A2.02.)

Reducing motor magnetic noise • Controlling hunting and vibration at low speeds

Depends on

capacity

0 to default

Reduce the setting if torque is insufficient for heavy loads. • Increase the setting if hunting or vibration occurs for light loads.

The proportional gain attenuation%whendecelerating(E5.14.)

Prevent vibration in

middle speed(10~40Hz)0 0~75

Reduce the value when torque not

enough with heavy load

Increase the value when vibration

with light load

Sensorl

ess

vector

control

(A2.01

.=1)

Vibration

prevention%

(E5.15.)

Prevent motor vibration

in high speed and light

load

0 30 Increase the value when vibration in

high speed and light load

Page 125: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

CH6 trial operation

6-12

proportional gain( E5.01. 、

E5.02.、E5.03.)

of ASR

Torque and speed response • Controlling hunting and vibration

20

30

30

0~100 Increase the setting if torque or speed response is slow. • Reduce the setting if hunting or vibration occurs.

ASR integral time(E5.04.

E5.05.、E5.06.)

Torque and speed response • Controlling hunting and vibration

500ms

100ms

50ms

0~1000msReduce the setting if torque or speed response is slow. • Increase the setting if hunting or vibration occurs.

ASR gain switching frequency (E5.07.)

Switching the ASR proportional gain and integral time according to the output frequency

50.0Hz 0.0~

300.0Hz

Set the output frequency at which to change the ASR proportional gain and integral time when the same values cannot be used for both high-speed and low-speed operation.

Torque filter

time(E5.09)

Controlling hunting and vibration 1ms

0.1~1ms

Vibration for low Machine rigidity,

increase the setting.

Carrier frequency selection(A2.02.)

Reducing motor magnetic noise • Controlling hunting and vibration at low speeds

Depends on

capacity

0 to default

Reduce the setting if torque is insufficient for heavy loads. • Increase the setting if hunting or vibration occurs for light loads.

The current gain attenuation%whendecelerating(E5.14.)

Prevent vibration in

middle speed(10~40Hz)0 0~75

Reduce the value when torque not

enough with heavy load

Increase the value when vibration

with light load

proportional gain( E5.01. 、

E5.02.、E5.03.)

of ASR

Torque and speed response • Controlling hunting and vibration

20

30

30

0~100 Increase the setting if torque or speed response is slow. • Reduce the setting if hunting or vibration occurs.

ASR integral time(E5.04.

E5.05.、E5.06.)

Torque and speed response • Controlling hunting and vibration

500ms

100ms

50ms

0~1000msReduce the setting if torque or speed response is slow. • Increase the setting if hunting or vibration occurs.

ASR gain switching frequency (E5.07.)

Switching the ASR proportional gain and integral time according to the output frequency

50.0Hz 0.0~

300.0Hz

Set the output frequency at which to change the ASR proportional gain and integral time when the same values cannot be used for both high-speed and low-speed operation.

Vector

control

(A2.01

.=2,3,

4,5)

Torque filter

time(E5.09)

Controlling hunting and vibration 1ms

0.1~1ms

Vibration for low Machine rigidity,

increase the setting.

·When using sensorless vector control,the Torque Compensation Gain(E6.01.)is invalid,for Permanent magnet

synchronous motor should set 0.1ms.

·In the sensorless vector control, the regeneration, if not reach the speed control accuracy, select the slip

compensation in the regeneration action for the effective(E6.03.=1).

·In V/F control,use the slip compensation to improve the speed control accuracy.Set motor rated current

(E2.03.),motor rated slip(E2.08.),motor no-load current(E2.07.).

Page 126: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

CH6 trial operation

6-13

The following user parameters will also indirectly affect the control system

Table 6.4 Parameters Indirectly Affecting Control and Applications

Name(NO.) Application

Dwell function (B1.10.、B1.11.) Used for heavy loads or large machine backlashes.

Acceleration/deceleration times (C1.01.~C1.09.)

Adjust torque during acceleration and deceleration.

S-curve characteristics (C2.01. ~C2.04.) Used to prevent shock when completing acceleration.

Jump frequencies (D3.01.~D3.03.) Used to avoid resonance points during operation.

Analog input filter time constant (H3.10)

Used to prevent fluctuations in analog input signals caused by noise.

Stall prevention (L4.07.~L4.12.)

Used to prevent 0 V (overvoltage errors) and motor stalling for heavy loads or rapid acceleration/deceleration. Stall prevention is enabled by default and the setting does not normally need to be changed. When using a braking resistor, however, disable stall prevention during deceleration.(L4.12=0)

Torque limits(E5.10.、E5.11.)

Used to increase response for acceleration/deceleration or to reduce overshooting when there is low machine rigidity and the gain of the speed controller (ASR) cannot be increased. The inertia ratio between the load and motor and the acceleration time of the motor running alone must be set.

Page 127: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Set Parameters According to the Function

This chapter indicates parameter types, meanings and settings of different functions.

■ Adjustment of Motor Related Parameters..............................................................................7-1 ■ Frequency Instruction..............................................................................................................7-11 ■ Operating Instruction..............................................................................................................7-16 ■ Stop Mode......................................................................................................................................7-19 ■ Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics..............................................................7-25 ■ Adjustment of Frequency Instruction..................................................................................7-33 ■ Limit of Speed(Frequency instruction Limit)..............................................................7-36 ■ Improve Operating Performance..............................................................................................7-37 ■ Mechanics Protection................................................................................................................7-40 ■ Speed Search................................................................................................................................7-46 ■ Drive Protection........................................................................................................................7-49 ■ Function of Input Terminals..................................................................................................7-50 ■ Monitoring....................................................................................................................................7-56 ■ Spical function..........................................................................................................................7-60 ■ Function of digital operator................................................................................................7-66 ■ PG signal detection..................................................................................................................7-71 ■ Supplement....................................................................................................................................7-75

7

Page 128: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Set Parameters According to the Function

7- 1

■ Adjustment of Motor Related Parameters

Adjust related parameters to suit different working environment.

Set Motor Parameters

Except E2.07.(no-load current of motor), E2.09.(Line to line resistor of motor)and E2.10.(leakage reactance of motor%), set all parameters as the data plate indicates. If the self-learning can not end normally, please set no-load current, line to line resistance and leakage reactance% of motor as the manual indicates.Or ask manufacturer of the motor.

Related Parameters control mode

Parameter

NO.

Name

content setting

range

factory

setting

storage

method V/F

Sensor

less

vector

non-

Synchron

-ous PG

vector

non-sync

-hronous

PG

magnetic

flux

synchronous

PG

vector

Synchronous

PG

magnetic

flux

E2.01. Rated power

of motor Set the power of motor 0.1~200.0 11.0* ○ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎

E2.02. Number of poles Set the number of poles 2~48 4 ☆ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎

E2.03. Rated current

of motor

Set rated current of motor.

The setting is the basic

value of motor protecting.

0.1~500.0 24.5A* ○ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎

rated voltage

of motor

set the rated voltage of

motor

E2.04. Rated inductive

potential

Corresponding inductive

potential when Rated

speed of PMSM

1~500 360V* ○ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎

E2.05. Rated frequency

of motor

Set the rated frequency

of motor

Fe=Ne*P/120

0.00~300.00 50.0Hz ○ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎

Page 129: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Set parameters according to the function

7- 2

control mode

Parameter

NO.

Name

content setting

range

factory

setting

storage

method V/F

Sensor

Less

vector

non-sync

-hronous

PG

vector

non-sync

-hronous

PG

magnetic

flux

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

synchronou

s PG

magnetic

flux

E2.06. rated rotating speed

of motor

Set the rated rotating

speed of motor 1~6000 1450RPM ○ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎

E2.07. No-load current

of motor

Set the no load current

of the motor 0.1~500.0 10.5A* ○ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎

E2.08. rated slip of motor set the rated slip of

motor 0.10~20.00 1.50Hz* ○ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ × ×

E2.09. Interline resistor

of motor

set the interline resistor

of motor 0.01~5.000 0.922* ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × ×

E2.10. Motor leakage

resistance

the voltage drop

caused by the motor

leakage , set by % the

rated voltage of

motor

0.0~60.0 18.0% ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × ×

*1. The factory setting will vary because of different drive power (The table shows the set value of 400V class 7.5kW drive).

Use Operation Manual to Set Motor Parameter The method of motor parameter setting is as followed. Refer to motor testing report to set parameters. Set the rated power, number of poles, rated voltage, rated frequency and rated rotating speed. Set related parameter as rated value in the data plate.

Set Rated Slip of Motor

Calculate the rated slip from the rated rotating speed in the rating plate of the motor and set into

parameter E2.08.. Rated slip of motor=rated frequency [Hz]-rated rotating speed[min-1]×number of poles/120

Set No-Load current of Motor

Please set the current value(no-load current)when motor is in rated voltage and rated

frequency in E2.07.

Usually the data plate does not record the no-load current value.If the self-learning

failed and the no-load current value can not be reached, please ask the manufacturer

of the motor, or take the no-load current value of 4 poles standard motor manufactured

by us as factory setting.

Set Line to Line Resistance of Motor

If the self-learning failed and the line to line resistance value can not be reached,

please ask the motor manufacturer. Calculate the line to line resistance which is from

the testing report with the following formula:

Page 130: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Set Parameters According to the Function

7- 3

Type E insulation: line to line resistance(Ω) of 75℃ in the testing report×0.92

Type B insulation: line to line resistance(Ω) of 75℃ in the testing report×0.92

Type F insulation: line to line resistance(Ω) of 115℃ in the testing report×0.87

Set Leakage Reactance of Motor

Leakage reactance is the voltage drop caused by leakage reactance of motor and %

compared to rated voltage. It need to be set when low reactance motor such as high

speed motor is used. If the self-learning failed and the leakage reactance value can

not be reached, please ask the motor manufacturer.

Set Motor Iron Loss

In PG vector control mode, Adjust the motor iron loss (usually the set not need change )in the following situation. The already set motor iron is the torque compensation. The bearing of motor brings high torque loss. The blower fan and water pump bring high torque loss.

Page 131: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Set parameters according to the function

7- 4

Set V/f curve

When Control mode A2.01 is set as 0, the motor is V/F control. Set the V/F curve according to the requirments.

Related Parameters control mode

Parameter

NO.

Name

content setting

range

factory

setting

storage

method V/F

Sensor

less

vector

non-sync

-hronous

PG

vector

non-

Synchr

-onous PG

magnetic

flux

Synchronous

PG

vector

synchronous

PG

magnetic

flux

E1.01. Fundamental

frequency(FA) 0.0~600.0 50.0Hz ○ ◎ × × × × ×

E1.02. (VMAX)Maximum

output voltage 0.0~480.0 380.0V ○ ◎ × × × × ×

E1.03. Intermediate

output frequency(FB) 0.0~600.0 3.0Hz ○ ◎ × × × × ×

E1.04.

Intermediate

output voltage (VC )

0.0~480.0 15.0V ○ ◎ × × × × ×

E1.05. lowest output

frequency(FMIN) 0.0~300.0 1.5Hz ○ ◎ × × × × ×

E1.06. Lowest output

Voltage(VMIN)

Freq(H

Voltage(V)

FA

VMAX

FBFMIN

VCVMIN

FMAX

0.0~480.0 9.0V ○ ◎ × × × × ×

E3.01. Fundamental

frequency(FA) 0.0~600.0 50.0Hz ○ ○ × × × × ×

E3.02. Maximum

output voltage(VMAX) 0.0~480.0 380.0V ○ ○ × × × × ×

E3.03. Intermediate

output frequency (FB) 0.0~600.0 3.0Hz ○ ○ × × × × ×

E3.04. Intermediate output

frequency voltage(VC) 0.0~480.0 15.0V ○ ○ × × × × ×

E3.05. Lowest output

frequency(FMIN) 0.0~300.0 1.5Hz ○ ○ × × × × ×

E3.06. lowest output

frequency oltage(VMIN)

Freq(Hz

Voltage(V)

FA

VMAX

FBFMIN

VCVMIN

FMAX

0.0~480.0 9.0V ○ ○ × × × × ×

*1. Content of E1.03. 、E1.04.、 E3.03. 、E3.04. are ignored when the set value is 0.0.

Page 132: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Set Parameters According to the Function

7- 5

V/f Curve The V/f control curve is as follows:

Figure 7.1 V/f curve

Caution when setting Pay attention to the followings when set any V/F curve.

Please set V/F curve according to different application situation.

Make sure of the following settings.

D2.01.≥ E1.01.> E1.03.≥E1.05. E1.02.> E1.04.≥ E1.06. D2.01.≥ E3.01.> E3.03.≥E3.05. E3.02.> E3.04.≥ E3.06.

Set ASR Parameters

The speed control(ASR) of vector control is to adjust to zero deviation of the speed

instruction and speed checking out value (feedback of PG or speed presumption), and

operate torque instruction.

The following shows the ASR diagram of vector control.

Figure 7.2 ASR control diagram

Page 133: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Set parameters according to the function

7- 6

Related Parameters control mode

Parameter

NO.

Name

content setting

range

factory

setting

storage

method V/F

Sensor

less

vector

non-

Synchron

-ous

PG

vector

non-sync

-hronous

PG

magnetic

flux

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

Synchro

n-ous

PG

magneti

c flux

E5.01. high speed proportion gain 0~100 20 ○ × × ○ ○ ○ ○

E5.02. low speed proportion gain 0~100 30 ○ × × ○ ○ ○ ○

E5.03. Starting proportion gain 0~100 30 ○ × × ○ ○ ○ ○

E5.04. high speed integration time 0~1000 500mS ○ × × ○ ○ ○ ○

E5.05. low speed integration time 0~1000 100mS ○ × × ○ ○ ○ ○

E5.06. Staring integration time

E5.01. E5.04.

E5.02. E5.05.

Feedback frequencyE5.07.

P, I

0~1000 50mS ○ × × ○ ○ ○ ○

E5.07. ASR switching frequency

High speed,low speed

gain, switching

Frequency of

integrating time

0.00~300.00 50.00Hz ○ × × ○ ○ ○ ○

E5.08. Upper limit of integrating

Upper limit of

integrating,

measured by %

0~100 100% ○ × × ○ ○ ○ ○

E5.09. Torque filter time Delay of instruction

torque, measured by mS0.2~25.0 1.0mS ○ × × ○ ○ ○ ○

E5.10. Drive torque upper limit 0.0~500.0 150.0% ○ × × ○ ○ ○ ○

E5.11.

Braking torque upper limit

When the torque of the

motor reach to upper

limit, motor rotated

speed becomes invalid

because of the torque

superiority. So the

accelerating and

decelerating time

increased and rotated

speed go down.

0.0~500.0 150.0% ○ × × ○ ○ ○ ○

E5.12. Source of torque upper limit

Set the source of

torque upper limit of

drive:

0:operator

1: analog terminal F1

2: analog terminal F2

3:analog terminal F3

4:extension 1

5:extension 2

6:extension 3

7:extension 4

0~2 0 ○ × × ○ ○ ○ ○

Page 134: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Set Parameters According to the Function

7- 7

ASR Adjusting of Speed Control in Vector Control In the state of practical load(state of connecting mechanics), please adjust E5.01 and 5.06. The following shows the adjusting order.

Reduce E5.03.( s tar t ing proportional gain) in zero speed until no vibration

Reduce E5.06.( s tar t ing integration time ) in zero speed until no vibration

Vibration happens in max speed?

End

Reduce E5.01.( high speed proportional gain) in high speed until no vibration

Reduce E5.04.( high speed in tegra t ion t ime ) in h igh speed until no vibration

NO

YES

Page 135: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Set parameters according to the function

7- 8

Slight Gain Adjusting

To adjust the gain more slightly, please adjust the gain while observing speed waveform. The following shows the example of observing the parameters of speed waveform.

Parameter

NO.

Name

content setting description

H4.01. Monitoring item

of terminal FM

Set monitoring case number from Multifunctional analog

output terminal (from U1.01.~U1.09.part selection of 01~09)2

H4.02. Output gain

of terminal FM

Set monitoring case number from Multifunctional analog

output terminal 100

H4.03. Output deviation

of terminal FM

Set the voltage deviation ouput from multifunctional analog output

terminal FM 0

Set FM as monitoring terminal of output

frequency

H4.04. Monitoring item

of terminal AM

Set monitoring case number from multifunctional analog

Output terminal(from U1.01.~U1.09 .part selection of 01~09)4

H4.05. Output gain

of terminal AM

Set the voltage gain ouput from multifunctional analog output

terminal FM 100

H4.06. Output deviation

of terminal AM

Set the voltage deviation ouput from multifunctional analog output

terminal FM 0

Set AM as monitoring terminal of motor

speed

According to above setting, multifunctional analog output state are as follows:

Mutifunctional analog output FM: 0~10V to 0~D2.01(maximal output frequency) output the motor output frequency.

Mutifunctional analog output AM: 0~10V to 0~D2.01(maximal output frequency) output the motor output speed.

Multifunctional analog output common terminal is FC.

In order to observe the feedback relay and instruction equation, monitoring output frequency and motor speed are hoped.

Page 136: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Set Parameters According to the Function

7- 9

Slight Adjustment of ASR Proportion Gain[Example: E5.01.(high speed proportion

gain)]

Set proportion gain of speed control (ASR). Adjusting proportion gain of speed control (ASR). The response increased when add the set value. Usually, the larger the load is ,the lager the set value is. But the over large value will cause vibration. The following shows the response example of adjusting proportion gain of speed control (ASR).

Figure 7.3 Response When Adjusting Proportion Gain

Slight Adjusting Speed Contrl(ASR)Integrating Time [Example: E4.01.(high speed

integrating time)]

Set speed contrl(ASR)integrating time. The prolonged integrating time caused lower response and weaker input feedback. Too short integrating time will lead to vibration. The following shows the response example of speed control (ASR) integrating time.

Speed control integral time is too long

Speed control integraltime is too short

Time

Motor speed

Figure 7.4 Response of Changing Integrating Time

Page 137: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Set parameters according to the function

7- 10

Gain Adjusting Switch in High Speed/Low Speed In low speed or high speed operating, when vibration is caused by resonance of mechanical system, please switch high speed/low speed proportion gain and integrating time. Proportion gain P and integrating time I can be switched according to the motor speed as following diagram.

Figure 7.5 Proportion Gain and Integrating Time Switching of High Speed/Low Speed

Set ASR Switching Frequency(E5.07.)

Set 80% of the motor rotating frequency or vibration frequency as ASR switching

frequency.

Adjusting in Low Speed Range(E5.02.、E5.03.、E5.05.、E5.06.)

Adjust in zero speed when connect actual load. Please increase the value of E5.02.and E5.03.if possible before vibration. In addition, reduce the value of E5.05.and E5.06.if possible before vibration.

Adjusting in High Speed Range(E4.01.、E4.04.)

Adjust in common operating state. Please increase the value of E5.01. if possible before vibration. In addition, reduce the value of E5.04.if possible before vibration.

Page 138: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Set Parameters According to the Function

7- 11

■ Frequency Instruction The method of inputting frequency instruction are explained in thiis section.

Select Method of Inputting Frequency Instruction

Set parameter B1.04 to select the method of inputting frequency instruction.

Related Parameters control mode

parameter

NO.

Name

content setting

range

factory

setting

storage

method V/F

sensor

less

vector

non-

Synchronous

PG vector

non-

synchronous

PG magnetic

flux

Synchronous

PG vector

synchronous

PG

magnetic

flux

B1.04.

Frequency

instruction

selection

Set the input method of frequency

instruction

0:operator

1:outer terminal control

2: analog terminal(active following)

3: analog terminal

(instruction following)

4: unused

5: torque control

6: position following

0~6 1 ☆ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎

Input Frequency Instruction using digital operator (operator setting)

Set parameter B1.04.=0. Use digital operator to input frequency instruction.

Motor operating frequency is set by pressing ENTER to revise the operating frequency in commonly

used monitoring item. Refer to chapter 3 for details about frequency setting.

Figure 7.6 Frequency Setting Menu

Page 139: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Set parameters according to the function

7- 12

Input Frequency Instruction by Voltage Set parameter B1.02.=2/3,input frequency instruction from analog input terminal F1 or F2.

Figure 7.7 Voltage Input of Frequency Instruction

Page 140: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Set Parameters According to the Function

7- 13

Multi-Speed Range/jogging operation

3 frequecy Instructions and 1 jogging frequency instruction can be used by set B1.04=1(select external terminal control of frequency instruction). The maximum speed range can reach to 9.

The following indicates the example of using multi-speed range instruction1~3 and jogging instruction to realize 9 range speed control.

Related Parameters control mode

Parameter

NO.

Name

content setting

range

factory

setting

storage

method V/F

Sensor

less

vector

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

non-

synchronous

PG

magnetic

flux

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

Synchr

-onous

PG

Magnetic

flux

D1.01. Frequency

instruction 1 use the frequency that set by the operator 0.00~500.00 0.00Hz ◎ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

D1.02. Frequency

instruction 2

Frequency instruction when

Multifunctional input terminal ”multi

speed range instruction 1 ” is on.

0.00~500.00 0.00Hz ◎ × × × × × ×

D1.03. Frequency

instruction 1

Frequency instruction when

Multifunctional input terminal ”multi

speed range instruction 2 ” is on.

0.00~500.00 0.00Hz ◎ × × × × × ×

D1.04. Frequency

instruction4

Frequency instruction Multifunctional

input terminal ”multi speed

range instruction 1,2 ”is on.

0.00~500.00 0.00Hz ◎ × × × × × ×

D1.05. Frequency

instruction 5

Frequency instruction when

Multifunctional input terminal ”multi

speed range instruction 3 ”is on.

0.00~500.00 0.00Hz ◎ × × × × × ×

D1.06. Frequency

instruction 6

Frequency instruction when

Multifunctional input terminal ”multi

speed range instruction 1,3 ” is on.

0.00~500.00 0.00Hz ◎ × × × × × ×

D1.07. Frequency

instruction 7

Frequency instruction when

Multifunctional input terminal ”multi

speed range instruction 2,3” is on.

0.00~500.00 0.00Hz ◎ × × × × × ×

D1.08. Frequency

instruction8

Frequency instruction when

Multifunctional input terminal ”multi

speed range instruction 1,2,3 ” is on.

0.00~500.00 0.00Hz ◎ × × × × × ×

D1.09.

Jogging

(inching)

frequency

Frequency instruction when

Multifunctional input terminal ”multi

speed range instruction 4 ”is on.

0.00~500.00 6.00Hz ◎ × × × × × ×

Page 141: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Set parameters according to the function

7- 14

Multifunctional Input Terminals(H1.01.~H1.07.)

In order to switch frequency instruction, please input multi-speed range instruction 1~3 and jogging

frequency selection in multifunctional connecting point. Terminal Parameter NO. Set Value Content

X3 H1.01. 1 Multi speed range instruction 1

X4 H1.02. 2 Multi speed range instruction 2

X5 H1.03. 3 Multi speed range instruction 3

X6 H1.04. 4 jogging instruction

The Combination of speed segment and Multi-functional input

terminals status

The setting of multi-speed range1~3 and jogging frequency selection can be combined with multifunctional input terminal X3 ~ X6 ( ON/OFF ) to select corresponding frequency. The combinations are as follows.

TerminalX3 TerminalX4 TerminalX5 TerminalX6 Speed Range

Multi Speed Range

Instruction1

Multi Speed Range

Instruction 2

Multi Speed Range

Instruction 3

jogging frequency selection

The Selected Frequency

1 OFF OFF OFF OFF Frequency instruction 1

D1.01.

2 ON OFF OFF OFF Frequency instruction 2

D1.02.

3 OFF ON OFF OFF Frequency instruction 3

D1.03.

4 ON ON OFF OFF Frequency instruction 4

D1.04.

5 OFF OFF ON OFF Frequency instruction 5

D1.05.

6 ON OFF ON OFF Frequency instruction 6

D1.05.

7 OFF ON ON OFF Frequency instruction 7

D1.07.

8 ON ON ON OFF Frequency instruction 8

D1.08.

9 — — — ON Frequency instruction 9

D1.09.

The selection of terminal X6 jogging frequency selection is prior to multi speed range instruction.

For normal operation of motors, enter the appropriate operating instructions

Page 142: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Set Parameters According to the Function

7- 15

Wiring Connection Example and Time Sequence Diagram The followings are terminal wiring connection example and sequence diagram of control loop in 9 speed range operation.

Figure 7.8 Terminal Wiring Connection of Control Loop in Speed Range Operation

Figure 7.9 Time Sequence of Multi Speed Range Instruction/Inching Frequency Selection

Page 143: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Set parameters according to the function

7- 16

■ Operating Instruction This section explains the input method of operating instruction.

Select the Input Method of Operating Instruction

Set parameter B1.01.to select input method of operating instruction.

Related Parameters Control Mode

Parameter

NO.

Name

content

Range

set

Factory

setting

Storage

methord

V/FSensor

less

vector

non-

synchronous

vector

with PG

non-

synchronous

magnetic

flux with

PG

Synchronous

vector with

PG

Synchronous

magnetic

flux with

PG

B1.01. Operation instruction

select

set the input method of

operation instruct

0: operator

1:external terminal

control

2: serial

0~2 1 ☆ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎

B1.02 Operation mode

select

Set input method of

operation mode

0: Positive and negative

direction

1: Three-wire system

2: enabled+direction

0~2 0 ☆ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎

Operation with digital operator

Set parameterB1.01.=0, operate the drive with Stop

key in digital operator.Refer to Chapter 3 for

details about digital operator . Switch the rotating direction of motor by switch the set value (0/1)of parameter O1.02(Function of operating key).

Operate the Drive with multi-functional Terminals

Set parameter B1.01.=1, operate the drive with control loop terminal.

Operate with positive and negative direction The factory setting is positive and negative direction control. Drive runs in positive direction when terminal X1 is ON and stops when it is OFF. Similarly, drive runs in negative direction when terminal X2 is ON and stops when it is OFF.

Page 144: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Set Parameters According to the Function

7- 17

Figure 7.10 Wiring Connecting Example of direction Control

Operate with 3-wire system Control

Malti-functional Input Terminals(H1.01.~H1.07.)

Terminal Parameter

No. Set Value Explanation

X3 H1.01 9 the function of terminals X1, X2 is 3-wire operating instruction(positive/negative instruction)

If set any of the parameters H1.01.~H1.06. as 9, the terminals X1 and X2 are set to 3-wire system control. The set multi-functional input terminal is the co-rotating/counter rotating instruction terminal. Take H1.01.=9 as example, the diagram indicates the 3-wire operating instruction:

Figure 7.11 Wire Connecting Example of 3-wire Operating Instruction

Figure 7.12 Time Sequence Diagram of 3-wire Operating Instruction

Page 145: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Set parameters according to the function

7- 18

Use 3-wire system control connection when the operating instruction of terminal X3 is ON

for 50ms. Make the drive keep operating state.

Operate using enabled+direction control

When X1 is on,the drive is enabled,meanwhile,X2 is on,the drive make the motor run.when X1 is OFF ,the drive stop running.

Figure 7.13 Wiring Connecting Example of enabled+direction

Page 146: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Set Parameters According to the Function

7- 19

■ Stop Mode

This section explains the stop mode of the drive.

Select Stop Mode by Stop Instruction

Select stop mode of motor by parameter B1.03.: deceleration-stop sliding-stop time limited deceleration-stop DC braking sliding-stop all range DC braking stop But in PG vector control, Selection of time limited deceleration-stop, DC braking

sliding-stop and all range DC braking stop are not permitted.

Related Parameters control mode

parameter

NO.

Name

content Setting

range

factory

setting

storage

method V/F

Sensor

less

vector

non-

synchr

-onous

PG vector

non-

synchronous

PG

magnetic

flux

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

Synch

-ronous

PG

magnetic

flux

B1.03. Stopping

mode selection

0: sliding stop

1: decelerating stop

2: time limited decelerating stop

3: DC braking while sliding stop

4: All range DC braking stop

0~4 0 ☆ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

B1.06

select the

output frequency

action of under

lowest output

frequency

Set the running choice for given frequency

lower than lowest operation

0: running according to frequency choice

1: zero speed operation

2:running as E2.05

3:Base closure

0~3 0 ☆ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

B1.09 DC braking current Take drive rating current as 100%,set

DC braking current with the unit %0~150 100% ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

C1.01. Accelerating

time 1

Accelerating time form 0% to

100% maximum frequency,

measured by second

0.10~600.00 2.50S ◎ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

C1.02. decelerating

time1

Accelerating time form 0% to 100%

maximum frequency, measured by

second

0.10~600.00 2.50S ◎ × × × × × ×

* Setting range is 0 or 1 in PG control mode.

Page 147: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Set parameters according to the function

7- 20

complementarity

Sliding-stop(B1.03.=0)

Output voltage of power is cut off when input stop instruction(operating instruction is OFF). Motor carry on sliding-stop according to its decelerating speed which is decided by load inertia proportion and mechanical friction.

Figure 7.14 sliding Stop

After inputting the stop instruction, the operating instruction can be ignored in minimum

base closure time(C3.01).

Decelerating-stop(B1.03.=1)

Motor carry on decelerating-stop according to the selected decelerating time 『 factory setting:C1.02.(decelerating time1) 』. Once the output frequency is below zero speed threshold value frequency(J1.01) during decelerating-stop, The motor can only adapt DC braking current(B1.09) to carry on DC braking in set time of DC braking time(C3.05) when stop. The setting of decelerating time, please refer to “Set Accelatating and Decelerating Time”.

Figure 7.15 Decelerating-stop

Page 148: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Set Parameters According to the Function

7- 21

When select PG control(A2.01.=2, 3, 4 or 5), The stop operation has the following differences according to the set of below minimal output frequency(B1.06.)

OFF ON OFF

0

Frequency input by analog

Running instruction

E1.06.

B1.06.= 0( frequency)

B1.06.= 1( zero running)

B1.06.= 2( running by E1.05.)

Excition

Base closure

Base closure

Base closure C3.02.

C3.02.

C3.02.

Zero speed control

Zero speed control

Zero speed control

Base closure

Base closure

Base closureC3.02.

C3.02.

C3.02.

When running OFF, start zero speed control when speed below E1.05

When running OFF, start zero speed control when speed below E1.05

When running OFF, start zero speed control when speed below E1.05

Excition

Excition

Figure 7.16 Decelerating-stop (With PG Control)

Time Limited Decelerating-stop(B1.03.=2)

Input stop instruction(operating instruction is OFF).Motor decelerated to stop as the selected decelerating gradient. When adecelerating time reached DC braking time(C3.05)when stop, motor carry on sliding-stop according to its decelerating speed which is decided by load inertia proportion and mechanical friction. Decelerating gradient is decided by maximal output frequency(D2.01.)and decelerating time of

abnormal stop(C1.09)

Figure 7.17 Time Limited decelerating-stop

Page 149: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Set parameters according to the function

7- 22

complementarity

DC Braking while Sliding-stop(B1.03.=3)

After input stop instruction(operating instruction is OFF), if the output frequency is higher than than zero speed threshold value frequency(J1.01.), the drive will cut off output; if lower, the drive will cut off output after carry on DC braking.

Figure 7.18 DC Braking Inertia Stop

All Range DC Braking Stop(B1.03.=4)

Input stop instruction(operating instruction is OFF), DC braking current(B1.09) gets into motor to carry on DC braking stop after minimum base closure time(C3.01). DC braking time is decided by output frequency when stop instruction is input and DC braking time(C3.05) when motor stop.

Figure 7.19 DC Braking Stop in All Range

When stop, if overcurrent alarm(OC1) happened in speed change , please prolong minimum

closure time(C3.01).

Page 150: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Set Parameters According to the Function

7- 23

DC Braking

Set starting DC braking time(C3.02) and stopping DC braking time(C3.05) to give sliding motor DC braking current to stop the motor, then start again.

Set starting DC braking time(C3.02) as 0, So the starting DC braking is invalid. Set stopping DC braking time(C3.05) as 0, So the stopping DC braking is invalid. Set B1.09 parameter of DC braking current. Motor carried out excitation according to the no-load current(E2.07.) when PG control.

Related Parameters control mode

parameter

NO.

name

content setting

range

factory

setting

storage

method V/F

Sensor

less

vector

non-synchr

onous PG

vector

non-sy

nchron

ous PG

magnet

ic flux

synchr

onous

PG

vector

synchronous PG

magnetic flux

B1.09. DC braking current

Take drive rating current

as 100%, set DC braking

current with the unit %

0~150 100% ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

C3.02 DC braking time

during startup

The primary excitation time

from accepting of running

instruction to executing.

0.00~2.50 0.30S ◎ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

C3.05. DC braking time

during stop

The delayed time from canceling

of the running instruction to

cutting of the drive output

0.00~2.50 0.50S ◎ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

E2.07. No load current

of motor

Set the no load current of the

motor 0.1~500.0 10.5A* ○ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎

The following is the time sequence of DC braking:

Figure 7.20 DC Braking Time Sequence

Page 151: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Set parameters according to the function

7- 24

Abnormal Stop

If set any of the parameters H1.01.~H1.07.(Multifunctonal input terminalX3~X8)as 11(Abnormal stop), and the corresponding terminal is on,the motor will decelerating to stop in the set time limit C1.09. Afer input the abnormal stop instruction, operator settings are prohibited till the drive stopped. Set operating instruction and abnormal stop instruction as OFF to release abnormal stop instruction.

Related Parameters control mode

Parameter

NO.

Name

content setting

range

factory

setting

storage

method V/F

Sensor

less

vector

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

magnetic

flux

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

Synchr

-onous

PG

Magnetic

flux

C1.09. Abnormal stop

decelerating time

Set abnormal stop time as

100% to 0% deceleration time0.1~20.0 2.0S ◎ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Function setting of multi-functional input terminal(H1.01.~H1.07.)

setting function description 11 Abnormal stop decelerate to stop in the set time limit C1.09 when ON

Time Sequence

ON OFFOFF

ON OFFOFF

Operation signal

Brake signal

Output frequency

Time

Zero threshold frequency( J1.01.)

OFF ON

C1.01.C1.09. C1.02..C1.01.

Figure 7.21 Time Sequence of abnormal stop

Page 152: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Set Parameters According to the Function

7- 25

■ Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics

The acceleration and deceleration characteristics are explained in this section.

Set Acceleration and Deceleration time

Acceleration time: the time period from 0%maximal output frequency to 100% Deceleration time: the time period from 100%maximal output frequency to 0% Factory setting of acceleration time is C1.01; and deceleration time is C1.02.

Related Parameters control mode

Parameter

NO.

Name

content setting

range

Factory

setting

Storage

method V/F

Sensor

less

vector

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

magnetic

flux

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

Synchr

-onous

PG

magnetic

flux

C1.01. Accelerating time 1

Accelerating time form 0% to 100%

maximum frequency, measured

by second

0.10~600.00 2.50S ◎ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

C1.02. decelerating time1

Accelerating time form 0% to 100%

maximum frequency, measured

by second

0.10~600.00 2.50S ◎ × × × × × ×

C1.03. Accelerating time2 Accelerating time 2/ /principle

axis positioning accelerating time 0.10~600.00 5.00S ◎ × × × × × ×

C1.04. decelerating time2 decelerating time 2/principle

axis positioning decelerating time 0.10~600.00 5.00S ◎ × × × × × ×

C1.05. Accelerating time 3 Accelerating time 3 0.10~600.00 2.00S ◎ × × × × × ×

C1.06. decelerating time3 decelerating time3 0.10~600.00 2.00S ◎ × × × × × ×

C1.07. Accelerating time 4 Accelerating time 4 0.10~600.00 2.00S ◎ × × × × × ×

C1.08. decelerating time 4 decelerating time 4 0.10~600.00 2.00S ◎ × × × × × ×

C1.09. Abnormal stop

decelerating time

Set abnormal stop time as 100% to 0%

deceleration time 0.1~20.0 2.0S ◎ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

C1.10. accelerating

switch frequency

Set auto switch accelerating frequency..

Multifunctional input” acceleration time

selecting” is superior to auto switch

0~300.00 0.00Hz ◎ × × × × × ×

C1.11. Decelerating

switch frequency

Set auto switch accelerating frequency.

Multifunctional input” deceleration time

selecting” is superior to auto switch

0~300.00 0.00Hz ◎ × × × × × ×

Page 153: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Set parameters according to the function

7- 26

Control Mode

Parameter

NO.

Name

Content Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Storage

Method V/F

Sensor

less

vector

non-

Synchr

-Onous

PG

vector

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

magnetic

flux

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

Synchr

-onous

PG

magnetic

flux

C2.01. Accelerating start corner time 0.01~2.50 0.90S ◎ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

C2.02. Accelerating end corner time 0.01~2.50 0.60S ◎ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

C2.03. decelerating start corner time 0.01~2.50 0.60S ◎ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

C2.04. decelerating start corner time

0.01~2.50 0.90S ◎ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

C3.01 Minimum base electrode

blocking time

Set the minimum base electrode

blocking time measured by second.0.1~2.50 0.50S ◎ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

C3.02. DC braking time during startup

The primary excitation time from

accepting of running instruction to

executing.

0.00~2.50 0.30S ◎ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

C3.03. Open gate delay time

After the excitation, drive send

band breaking signal. When the cut

off delay time(make sure the band

breaking is on)passed, the drive

will start to respond frequency

instruction.

0.00~2.50 0.20S ◎ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

C3.04 Starting delay 0.01~2.50 0.20S ◎ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

C3.05 DC braking time during stop

The delayed time from canceling of

the running instruction to cutting of

the drive output

0.00~2.50 0.50S ◎ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

C3.04. Output transition time to stop

Gradually cut off the motor

output torque of the power

transition period, measured by

second.

0.00~2.50 0.00S ◎ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Switch Acceleration and Deceleration Time by Multifunctional

Input Terminal

Drive can switch acceleration and deceleration time by multifunctional input terminal.Set any one of parameters in H1.01.~H1.07. as27(Acceleration and deceleration time 1 ), 28(Acceleration and deceleration time 2), the acceleration and deceleration time can be switched by combining the ON/OFF of the terminal. The follwing table indicates the switch of acceleration and deceleration time by the combination of ON/OFF

C.2.01.

C.2.02. C.2.03.

C.2.04.

time

export

Page 154: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Set Parameters According to the Function

7- 27

Terminal 1 for acceleration and deceleration time

Terminal 2 for acceleration and deceleration time

Acceleration Time

Deceleration time

OFF OFF C1.01. C1.02.

ON OFF C1.03. C1.04.

OFF ON C1.05. C1.06.

ON ON C1.07. C1.08.

Auto Switch Acceleration and Deceleration Time Auto switch acceleration and deceleration time by already set frequency. When output frequency reached to C1.10 or C1.11,drive will switch the acceleration and deceleration time automatically. Set the parameter C1.10 and C1.11 the value except 0.0Hz. Set parameters C1.10 and C1.11 0.0Hz or select the acceleration and deceleration time switched by multifunctional terminals,and then the auto switch is invalid.

acceleration:when output frequency≤C1.10,operate as acceleration time C1.03

when output frequency≥C1.10,operate as acceleration time C1.01

deceleration:when output frequency≤C1.11,operate as acceleration time C1.04

when output frequency≥C1.11,operate as acceleration time C1.02

Figure 7.22 Auto Switch the Acceleration and Deceleration

Set Acceleration and Deceleration Corner time The mechanical conflict at starting and stopping can be reduced by using corner time to accelerate and decelerate the motor.

Page 155: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Set parameters according to the function

7- 28

complementarity

Figure 7.23 Acceleration and Deceleration Corner Time

Prolong the acceleration time and deceleration time as follows after the setting of corner time

Actual acceleration time= acceleration time+(start acceleration corner time+ end acceleration corner

time)/2

Actual deceleration time= deceleration time+(start deceleration corner time+ end deceleration corner

time)/2

Operating Time Sequence

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)

Explanations: (1) Contactor close delay/Base closure( C3.01.) (2) Excitation/DC lock/Speed capture/Bias torque output time (C3.02.) (3) Brake open delay( C3.03.) (4) Zero speed lock/DC lock Transition time( C3.04.)

(5) DC parking lock/Brake release delay( C3.05.)(6) Current release delay( C3.06.)(7) Contactor discontect delay( C3.07.)If not set contactor control terminal,(1)(7)delay not carried out;if not she brake control terminal,(3)(6)delay not carried out.

Speed

Current/torque

Torque rise rate

Speed capture

Figure 7.24 Braking Control Time Sequence

Page 156: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Set Parameters According to the Function

7- 29

Acceleration and Deceleration of Heavy Load(Function

DWELL)

This function is to keep the stability of output frequency during the starting and stopping process of heavy load. By keep the short time output, the stall station of motor can be prevented. Must select deceleration stop(B1.03.=1) when use DWELL function.

Related Parameters control mode

Parameter

NO.

Name

content setting

range

factory

setting

Storage

method V/F

Sensor

Less

vector

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

magnetic

flux

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

Synchr

-onous

PG

magnetic

flux

B1.03. Stopping mode selection

0: inertia stop

1: decelerating stop

2: time limited decelerating stop

3: DC braking inertia stop

4: All range DC braking stop

0~4 0 ☆ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

B1.10. DWELL frequency

when starting up 0.00~2.50 0.00 Hz ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

B1.11. DWELL time when

starting up

Keep output frequency momently

to prevent the motor from

entering stall state when start

up with big inertia load 0.00~2.50 0.00S ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Prevent the stall of motor during acceleration (stall

prevention function during acceleration)

This function is to stop the motor from stall state in tense acceleration or heavey load. If set the stall proof function valid(L4.07.=1), the drive will start to restrain the accelerating speed when output current exceeds 85% of the stall protection threshold(L4.08). If the ouput current exceeds the stall protection threshold(L4.08), the motor will stop acceleration.

Page 157: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Set parameters according to the function

7- 30

Related Parameters control mode

Parameter

NO.

Name

content setting

range

factory

setting

storage

method V/F

non-sync

-hronous

PG

vector

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

magnet

ic flux

synchr

onous

PG

vector

synchro

nous PG

magneti

c flux

non-

Synchronous

PG

vector

L4.07.

Stall prevention

function in

Acceleration

0:invalid

1:valid(stop acceleration

when exceed value of L4.08

Reaccelerate when current

recovered)

0,1 0 ○ × × ○ ○ ○ ○

L4.08. Threshold of Stall protecting

in acceleration

Set stall protecting function

with unit %. Take rated current

of drive as 100%.

50~200 150% ○ × × ○ ○ ○ ○

L4.09. limit of Stall protecting

in acceleration

set stall protecting function

with unit%. Take rated current

of the drive as 100%

0~100 50% ○ × × ○ ○ ○ ○

Page 158: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Set Parameters According to the Function

7- 31

Time Sequence Diagram The follwing is the frequency diagram when L4.07= 1.

Control the output frequency to protecting in accelleration

time

time

Output frequency

Output current

Threshold of Stall protecting in acceleration L4.08.

L4.08.- 15%

Figure 7.25 Time Sequence of Stall Proof Fuction during Acceleration

Set the Cautions Please reduce the set value of L4.08 when the motor capcity is smaller than the drive’s or the

factory settings cause stall state. When motor operated in the rated output state, reduce the stall protection threshold

value(L4.08)during acceleration to prevent stall in stated output range. Parameter L4.09. is the limit that can prevent stall in rated output range.

Figure 7.26 threshold of Stall Protection during Acceletation/Limit Preventing time sequence

Page 159: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Set parameters according to the function

7- 32

Prevent Over Voltage during deceleration (stall

prevention function during deceleration)

Stall prevention function is to restrain the increasing of bus voltage when the bus voltage exceeds the set value. Under this condition, even the set deceleration time is short, the corresponding bus voltage will prolong the deceleration time.

Related Parameters control mode

Parameter

NO.

Name

content

setting

range

factory

setting

storage

method V/F

Non

-synchronous

PG vector

Non

-synchro

nous PG

magnetic

flux

Synchronous

PG

vector

Synchr

-onous

PG

magnetic

flux

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

L4.12.

stall protection

functiingin deceleration

stall protecting of motor

function in deceleration

0: invalid

1:valid(once the voltage of

main loop exceeded

threshold value, stop

decelerating, accelerate after

the voltage come back),

when the setting is valid, the

braking unit of the drive will

stop working.

0,1 0 ○ × × ○ ○ ○ ○

Setting Example The following showes the stall prevention example during deceleration when parameter L4.12 is set

as 1.

Figure 7.27 Stall Prevention Action in Deceleration

Page 160: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Set Parameters According to the Function

7- 33

■ Adjustment of Frequency Instruction

This section explains the adjusting method of frequency instruction.

Adjust Analog Frequency Instruction

There are gain and deviation in analog input adjusting parameters.

Related Parameters control mode

Parameter

NO.

Name

content setting

range

factory

setting

storage

method V/F

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

magnetic

flux

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

Synchr

-onous

PG

magnetic

flux

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

H3.02.

iutput gain of terminal F1

Analog input value %of all functions

when F1 terminal input is 10V

(voltage), 20mA(current)

0.0~1000.0 100.0% ☆ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

H3.03 iutput deviation of

terminal F1

Analog input value %of all functions

when F1 terminal input

is 0V(voltage), 4mA(current)

-1000.0~1000.0 0.0 ☆ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

H3.05. iutput gain of terminal F2 The same as H3.02. 0.0~1000.0 100.0% ☆ × × × × × ×

H3.06. iutput deviation

of terminal F2 The same as H3.03 -100.0~100.0 0.0 ☆ × × × × × ×

H3.08. input gain of

expending terminal F3 The same as H3.02. 0.0~1000.0 100.0% ☆ × × × × × ×

H3.09. input deviation

of expending terminal F3 The same as H3.03 -100.0~100.0 0.0 ☆ × × × × × ×

H3.10. Analog input terminal

filter time Filter time of Analog input sigaal 1~1000 10mS ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

H3.11. Zero potential threshold

of analog input value

absolute value of analog input

voltage signal is smaller than set

zero value

0.00~10.00 0.00V ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Page 161: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Set parameters according to the function

7- 34

complementarity

Adjusting analog Frequency Instruction by parameters The frequency instruction is inputted from control loop terminal as analog voltage. Use multifunctional analog input terminal F1 as frequency instruction terminal, adjust by H3.02 and H3.03 Use multifunctional anlalog input terminal F2 as frequency instruction terminal, adjust by H3.05 and H3.06 Use multifunctional analog input terminal F3 as frequency instruction terminal, adjust by H3.08 and H3.09 Take terminal F1 as example:

Figure 7.28 F1 Input

U2.03=(Vin/10V)×H2.03+H3.03 U2.03.:analog value of input terminal(100% to 10V).U2.04.and U2.05 are corresponding

to analog values of terminals F2 ang F3(100& to 10V)

Page 162: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Set Parameters According to the Function

7- 35

Avoid Resonance Operation(jump frequency function)

Jump frequency function is to void the resonace caused by drive carrier frequency and

inherent frequency of mechanics.

It is prohibited in jump frequency range, but change smoothly in acceleration and deceleration instead of jump.

Related Parameters control mode

Parameter

NO.

Name

content setting

range

factory

setting

Storage

method V/F

Sensor

less

vector

non-

synchronous

PG

vector

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

magnetic

flux

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

Synchr

-onous

PG

magnetic

flux

D3.01. jump frequency 1 0.0~300.0 0.0Hz ○ × × × × × ×

D3.02. jump frequency 2

Set the central value jump frequency which

is measured by Hz, jump frequency is invalid

when set the jump frequency 0.0 0.0~300.0 0.0Hz ○ × × × × × ×

D3.03. Jump frequency

amplitude

Set the central value jump frequency

amplitude which is measured by Hz,

(±D3.03.is leap frequency range)

0.0~300.0 0.00Hz ○ × × × × × ×

Control Time Sequence The relationship between set frequency and output frequency are as follows:

Figure 7.29 Time Sequence of Jump Frequency

Page 163: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Set parameters according to the function

7- 36

Set Cautions When setting jump frequency(D3.01.~D3.02.)as 0.0,it is invalid.

Be sure to set jump frequency as D3.01.≥D3.02.

■ Limit of Speed(Frequency instruction Limit) This section explains the methods to limit the motor speed.

Limit highest frequency

Set upper limit of frequency(D2.02)to prohibit the motor from operating above certain

frequency.

Set lower limit of frequency(D2.03)to prohibit the motor from operating below certain

frequency.

Set limit value of motor with unit % and take highest output frequency(D2.01) as 100%

Related Parameters control mode

Parameter

NO.

Name

content setting

range

factory

setting

storage

method V/F

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

magnetic

flux

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

Synchr

-onous

PG

magnetic

flux

non-

synchronous

PG vector

D2.01. Maximum Output

frequency (FMAX )

Highest output frequency the

drive allowed 10.00~300.00 50.0Hz ☆ × × × × × ×

D2.02. Upper limit

The upper limit value of

output frequency, the

highest frequency is 100%,

measured by %

0.0~110.00 100.00% ☆ × × × × × ×

D2.03. Lower limit

The lower limit value of

output frequency, the

highest frequency is 100%,

measured by %

0.0~100.00 0.00% ☆ × × × × × ×

Page 164: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Set Parameters According to the Function

7- 37

■ Improve Operating Performance This section explains the function of impriving operating performance.

Start/Low Speed compensation for Torque(Torque compensation)

It is the function to increase output torque when checking output load increased. In V/F control mode, It is used to compensate starting torque by calculate the primary voltage

loss according to output voltage(V). compensation voltage=primary voltage loss of moter×torque elevating gain(E6.01.)

Related Parameters control mode

Parameter

NO.

Name

content

Setting

range

factory

setting

Storage

method V/F

Sensor

less

vector

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

magnetic

flux

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

Synchr

-onous

PG

magnetic

flux

E6.01. Torque

elevating gain

In V/F control mode, set the torque

elevating gain according to the following

situation:

increase the set value when the cable is

too long

increase the set value when the motor

capacitor is smaller than the driver

capacitor.

Reduce the set value when the motor

vibrates

0.00~2.50 1.00 ○ ○ × × × × ×

E6.02.

Torque

elevating

delay time

set the relay time of torque elevating

function 10~10000 200ms ○ ○ × × × × ×

Page 165: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Set parameters according to the function

7- 38

Adujust Torque Compensation Gain Usually need no adjustment. Not adjusting in no-PG vector control. Adjusting as follows in V/F

control mode. Increasing setting value when wire is too long. Increase setting value when motor capacity<drive capacity Reduce setting value when motor vibrates.

Adjust output low speed current in the range of drive’s rated output current when carrying on torque compensation gain.

Adjust Relay Time Parameter of Torque Compensation Take ms as unit to set relay time of torque compensation. Set different parameters to different control modes.

V/Fcontrol:200ms No-PG vector control:20ms

Usually need no adjustment Adjust as following situations: Increase set value when motor vibrates Reduce set value when the response of motor is too low

Vibration Inhibition

Increase set value in sensorless vector control when high motor speed vibration or light load vibration. Reduce set value when the motor response is low.

Related Parameters control mode

Parameter

NO.

Name

content Setting

range

factory

setting

Storage

method V/F

Sensor

less

vector

non-

synchronous

PG

vector

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

Magnetic

flux

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

Synchr

-onous

PG

magnetic

flux

E5.15. Vibration

inhibition %

Increase the setting value during

Sersorless vector control , when vibration

happens as the motor is in high speed

and light load

0~50 0% ○ × ○ × × × ×

Page 166: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Set Parameters According to the Function

7- 39

Filter Time for Frequency Instruction

The function can restrain motor vibration in V/F control and with light load. Try to reduce setting value when high response is prior to vibration restrain. Increase set value when light load, reduce set value in stall state.

Related Parameter

control mode

Parameter

NO.

Name

content setting

range

Factory

setting

Storage

method V/F

Sensor

Less

vector

non-synchronous

PG vector

non-synchronous

PG magnetic flux

synchronous

PG vector

Synchronous

PG

magnetic

flux

D2.04. Frequency instruction

filter time 1~200 10mS ○ ○ × × × × ×

Page 167: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Set parameters according to the function

7- 40

■ Mechanics Protection This section explains the function of mechanics protection.

Carrier Frequency

Adjust switching frequency(carrier frequency) of motor’s output transistor to reduce

interference and leakage current.

Related Pareameter control mode

Parameter

NO.

Name

content setting

range

factory

setting

storage

method V/F

Sensor

less

vector

non-

synchronous

PG vector

non-

synchronous

PG

magnetic

flux

synchronous

PG vector

synchronous

PG

magnetic

flux

A2.02 carrier frequency Set the carrier frequency

of the drive 2.0~16.0 8.0K

☆ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎

*1. Factory setting varies as the drive capacity are different.

Caution of Setting Carrier Frequency Adjust the carrier frequency in the following situation:

Reduce the set carrier frequency when the wire between drive and motor is too long. Set carrier frequency in reference to the following table: Wiring Connection Distance Below 50m Below 100m Above100m

set value of A2.02(carrier frequency)

0.0~15.0kHz 0.0~10.0kHz 0.0~5.0kHz

Reduce carrier frequency when speed and torque are unstale in low speed. Reduce carrier frequency when the interference from drive effected the around machines. Reduce carrier frequency when drive generates larger leakage current. Increase carrier frequency when the meatal noise of motor are loud. By increasing carrier frequency, the overload current of drive is reduced. The overload of the

drive(OL1)can be checked out even if the overlea current are less than 150%.

Page 168: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Set Parameters According to the Function

7- 41

The following shows the reduced value of overload current.

Figure 7.30 Reduce of Overload Current of Drive

Limit Motor Torque (Torque Limit )

To restrain the torque function of motor, only effective in no-PG vector control. In no-PG vector control, Random value can be used as torque limit beacue the output torque is calculated inside.The certain load torque is not allowed and keep regenerative torque in certain degree.

Page 169: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Set parameters according to the function

7- 42

Related Parameters control mode

Parameter

NO.

Name

content setting

range

factory

setting

Storage

method V/F

Sensor

less

vector

non-

synchronous

PG vector

non-

Synchronous

PG

magnetic

flux

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

Synchr

-onous

PG

magnetic

flux

E5.10. Drive torque

upper limit 0.0~500.0 150.0% ○ × × ○ ○ ○ ○

E5.11.

Braking torque

upper limit

When the torque of the motor reach to

upper limit, motor rotated speed

becomes invalid because of the torque

superiority. So the accelerating and

decelerating time increased and rotated

speed goes down.

0.0~500.0 150.0% ○ × × ○ ○ ○ ○

E5.12. Source of torque

upper limit

Set the source of torque upper limit

of drive:

0:operator

1: analog terminal F1

2: analog terminal F2

3:analog terminal F3

4:extension 1

5:extension 2

6:extension 3

7:extension 4

0~2 0 ○ × × ○ ○ ○ ○

Set Torque Limit by Analog Value By selecting source of torque upper limit (E5.12), torque limit can be changed by input analog value. E5.12 = 0: operator E5.12.=1:analog terminal F1 E5.12.=2:analog terminal F2 E5.12.=3:analog terminal F3

E5.12.=4:extension 1 E5.12.=5:extension 2

E5.12.=6:extension 3 E5.12.=7:extension 4

Set Cautions because torque control is superior, the motor speed control and motor revising

is invalid when torque limit function is started. The acceleration and deceleration

time was prolonged and motor speed is reduced as a result.

Do not reduce the torque limit when use torque limit in rise and down load freely.It

will lead to fall and slip down.

Above 10Hz of output frequency the accuracy of torque limit reached to ±5% and the accuracy will decrease when output frequency is below 10Hz.

Page 170: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Set Parameters According to the Function

7- 43

Prevent Motor from Stall during Operation(Stall

Prevention Function in Stable Speed)

Drive will lower the output frequency automatically to prevent stall when transient

overload appears in constant speed operation.

Stall prevention function in stable speed. In constant speed operation, only valid in

V/F control. Motor will decelerate when output current exceeds set value of L4.11 and

coutinues for 100ms. Valid/invalid Satll prevention function in stable speed can be

set in L4.10.

Accelerating in set time when output current of drvie=[Stall prevention threshold

in stable speed(L4.11.)-2%]×rated current of motor(E2.03.)

Related Parameters control mode

Parameter

NO.

Name

content setting

range

factory

setting

Storage

method V/F

Sensor

less

vector

non-

Synchronous

PG vector

non-

synchronous

PG

magnetic

flux

Synchronous

PG

vector

Synchronous

PG

magnetic

flux

E2.03. Rated current

of motor

Set up rated current of motor.

The setting are the basic value

of motor protecting.

0.1~500.0 24.5A* ○ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎

L4.10. stall protecting

in stable speed

stall protecting in stable speed

of drive:

0: invalid

1:valid

0,1 0 ○ × × ○ ○ ○ ○

L4.11.

stall protection

threshold in

stable speed

set stall protection function

with unit%.Take the rating

current of the drive as 100%

50~200 160% ○ × × ○ ○ ○ ○

Overload Protection of Motor

Protect motor with electronic tempreture sensing devices inside the drive.

Page 171: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Set parameters according to the function

7- 44

Related Parameters control mode

Parameter

NO.

Name

content

setting

range

factory

setting

storage

method V/F

non-

synchronous

PG vector

non-

synchronous

PG magnetic

flux

Synch

-ronous

PG

vector

Synchr

-onous

PG

magnetic

flux

non-

synchronous

PG vector

L1.01. Motor overload

protection function

Action selecting of overload

0: invalid

1: free slide for stop

2: deceleration-stop

3: abnormal deceleration-stop

4: warning

0,1,2,3,4 1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

L1.02. Protection time for

motor overload

Set 150% overload detecting time

with unit minutes 0.1~10.0 1.0min ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Set Rated Current of Motor Set the rated current value as the data plate of motor in parameterE2.03 as the standard

current for eletronic heat protection.

Set Action Time of Motor Protecting Set overload protecting action time of motor in L1.02.

After operating as rated current , set temperature protecting time with 150% overload.

The factory setting is 150% 1 minutes.

The following is the protecting time characteristic of electronic temperature devices

as an example.

L1.02.=1.0 minute,60Hz operating,ommon motor characteristic(already setL1.01.=1)

Figure 7.31 Time Characteristics of Moter Protectiong Action

Page 172: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Set Parameters According to the Function

7- 45

Set Cautions When several motor is drived by one drive, please cancel the overload protecting

function(L1.01.=0).Set temperature protecting relay on the power line of the

motor to protect every motor’s load.

During using frequently the power source ON/OFF, when OFF,the protection function

can not be reached even set parameter L1.01 as 1(valid), because the temperature

protecting calculated result has been reset.

Reducing the value of L1.02.can check out the overload early.

Cooling ability decreased in low frequency operation in the use of common motor

(standard motor). Even keep the current below rated value in low frequency use,

the overload protection(OL1)will act. Use professional motor if rated current

operating in low frequency is needed.

Restrain the Rotating Direction of Motor

Prohibit the reversing instruction in the devices that reversing is not allowed(wind

blower, water pump, etc). So when the reversing instruction is input, it is not going

to be carried out.

Related Parameters control mode

parameter

NO.

Name

content setting

range

Factory

setting

storage

method V/F

Sensor

Less

vector

non-Synchronous

PG vector

non-

Synchronous

PG

magnetic

flux

Synchronous

PG vector

Synchronous

PG

magnetic

flux

B1.07. Reverse selection 0: can reverse

1: can not reverse 0,1 0 ☆ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎

Page 173: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Set parameters according to the function

7- 46

■ Speed Search This section explains the function of speed search.

Speed Search Speed Search is to test the practical speed of motor in the process of slip to stop and so on, and

restart the motor from this speed. It is effective to restart the wind blower in rotation caused by inertia when re-power on from powered off state and connected from industrial power source.

Related Parameters control mode

parameter

NO.

Name

content Setting

range

factory

setting

storage

method V/F

Sensor

less

vector

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

magnetic

flux

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

Synchronous

PG

Magnetic

flux

B2.01. Speed search mode

Set the accelerating search during

starting up

0:valid

1:speed inference

2:current track

0~2 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

B2.02. Action current

of speed search

Take drive rated current as 100%, set

DC braking current with the unit % as

action current

0~200 100% ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

B2.03.

deceleration time

of speed search

Set the output frequency decelerating time

of speed search action with s the unit,

please set the deceleration time from the

highest to the lowest output frequency

0.1~20.0 1.0S ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

B2.04. Waiting time of

speed search

If there is contactor in the output side of

the drive, please set delaying time for

contactor; running from instant reset,

waiting for the set time and start the speed

search action.

0.00~2.50 0.5S ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

B2.05. DC voltage

recovering time

After the speed search, time spent in

setting the output voltage of the

drive to recover to normal voltage

0.1~25.0 2.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

B2.06.

Search method for the

initial position

of magnetic pole

0: invalid(unused)

1:locked

2:unlocked

0~2 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

B2.07.

Magnetic pole testing

valve value

displacement

unused 0.1~25.0 1.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Page 174: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Set Parameters According to the Function

7- 47

importance

Multifunctional Input Terminal(H1.01.~H1.07.)

Set Value Function Explanation 23 Speed Search Not Used

Set Cautions Use external sequence controller to make the time which the operating instruction and

searching instrunction are both ON reach the minimum blocking time of base electrode (C3.01).

Set the waiting time for speed searching(B2.04) as 0.5s, the relay time of contactor when there is contactor at output side of the drive. Setting 0.0 will shorten the searching time if contactor is not used. The drive starts the speed searching after the waiting time.

Action current of Speed searching B2.02 is the checking out current when the current testing speed searching ended. If the current is below the value, the speed searching is over and accelerating to set frequency. Reduce the set value when can not restart.

Prolong the minimum base electrode blocking time (C3.01) when use the speed search after transient recovery speed to generate over current alarm(OC1,OC2, OC3).

Motor does not rotate in the process of static self-learning.

Selection of Speed Search Valid/Invalid speed search of B2.01starting. Carrying out speed search when input operating instruction with current checking out mode. The explanation to speed search of current checking out mode is as followed.

Speed Search of Current Chekcing out Speed Search in Starting

Time sequence diagram of speed search in starting or selecting of external speed search instruction.

B2.02.

1.0S

OFF ONrunning

utput frequency

Output current

Min base closure time( C3.01.) ×0.7**( B2.04.) is set by lower limit in speed search

waiting time

Start according to speed checked

Frequency set

Figure 7.32 Speed Search in Starting (current checking out mode)

Page 175: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Set parameters according to the function

7- 48

Speed Search after Short Time Base Electrode Blocking(Sequence stop recovering, etc)

If transient time is shorter than minimal base electrode blocking time

*1: accoding to output frequency before basic electrode blocking, the blocking time will be shortened. *2: After AC power source search, wait the minimun speed searching waiting time(B2.04).

Figure 7.33 Speed Search after Base-Electrode Blocking(Current checking out mode: transient time

<C3.01)

If transient time is longer than minimal base electrode blocking time(C3.01)

Note:if the base electrode blocking frequency in lowandthe cutting offo poer source time is long, the

action will be the same as the search 1.

Figure 7.34 Speed Search after Base-Electrode Blocking(Current checking out mode: transient time

>C3.01)

Page 176: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Set Parameters According to the Function

7- 49

■ Drive Protection

This section explains the function of protecting the body of the drive.

Reduce the Forcast Value of Driving Overheating

By installing temperature resistance to detecting the temperature of heat sink, the

drive can be protected. The over heating alarm can be forcasted in 10℃(factory

setting).

Related Parameters

control mode

Parameter

NO.

Name

content setting

range

factory

setting

storage

method V/F

non-

Synchronous

PG vector

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

magnetic

flux

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

Synchr

-onous

PG

magnetic

flux

non-

synchronous

PG vector

L2.01. Overheating protection

function of heat sink

Action selection voltage

of overheating:

0: invalid

1: free slide for stop

2: deceleration-stop

3: abnormal deceleration-stop

4: warning

0,1,2,3,4 1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

L2.02. Overheating protection

temperatureof heat sink

Set the overheating protection

temperature with unit℃ 50~120 85℃ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

L2.03.

Overheating protection

time of heat sink

Set overheating protection time

of heat sink with unit minute 1~250 10S ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Page 177: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Set parameters according to the function

7- 50

■ Function of Input Terminals

This section explains the terminal function and the opertating method by switching multifunctional output terminal(X3~X8) function.

Cut off Drive Output (base electrode blocking instruction)

If set the parameters H1.01.~H1.07.(selecting multifuctional connector input terminal X3~X8) as 24 or 25(base electrode blocking instruction NO/NC), the terminal action of ON/OFF can be used for base electrode blocking, and the base electrode blocking instruction can cut off the output of the drive. The motor is in the slip state then. When the base electrode blocking instruction are released, the drive will start operating by speed searching from the highest frequency.

Multifunctional Input Terminals(H1.01.~H1.07.)

Set

Value Function

Explanation

24 base electrode blocking NO base electrode blocking when on

25 base electrode blocking NC base electrode blocking when off.

Time Sequence of Base Electrode Blocking The followings are time sequence when using base electrode blocking.

Figure 7.35 Base Electrode Blocking Instruction

When base electrode blocking is used for lifting and dropping load, do not input base electrode blocking instruction frequently during operation, which will lead to sliding state soon, and result in dropping or sliding.

importance

Page 178: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Set Parameters According to the Function

7- 51

Stop Acceleration and Deceleration

Acceleration will stop when the acceleration stop instruction act, and continue to

operating in the speed. If set one of the parameters of H1.01.~H1.07.(selecting

multifunctional connecting terminals X3~X8)as 12(acceleration stop),the acceleration

and deceleration will stop when the terminal is on, and the output frequency of this

moment will be kept; when the terminal is OFF, acceleration and deceleration will be

started.

Multifunctional Input Terminal(H1.01.~H1.07.)

Set Value Function Explanation

12 Acceleration-stop and deceleration-stop

Time sequence of acceleration and deceleration The followings used the time sequence of acceleration and deceleration(12).

Figure 7.36 Time sequenc of acceleration and deceleration

Transient UP&DOWN State of Frequency Instruction

Set frequency instruction selection(B1.04) as 0(operator setting),the output

frequency will comply with the acceleration and deceleration time.

The function of external terminal control UP/DOWN instruction is that setting

H1.01~H1.07(function choice of multifunctional connector input terminal X3~X8) as

5(UP instruction) and 6 (down instruction),adjusting the function of drive frequency

instruction.

Match the UP and DOWN instruction for application, connect each with a terminal. Be

sure to set B1.01(operating instruction selection) as 1(external terminal control).

The UP/DOWN 的 instruction is controlled by the ON/OFF of up/down key of the operator, and the adjustment of the drive frequency. Set(O1.03.=1) using UP/DOWN instruction of manipulator.

Page 179: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Set parameters according to the function

7- 52

Related Parameters Control Mode

Parameter

NO.

Name

content

Range

set

Factory

setting

Storage

methord

V/FSensor

less

vector

non-

Synchr

-onous

vector

with PG

non-

Synchr

-onous

magnetic

flux

with PG

Synchr

-onous

vector

with PG

Synchr

-onous

magnetic

flux

with PG

B1.01. Run

instruction select

set the input method

of operation instruction

0: operator

1: terminal control

2: serial

0~2 1 ☆

B1.024

Frequency

instruction selection

Set the input method

of frequency instruction

0:operator

1:outer terminal control

2: analog terminal

(dynamic following)

3: analog terminal

(instruction following)

4: PG card

5:torque control

6:position following

0~5 1 ☆

O1.03. UP/DOWN

function

Function when setting operator

giving input frequency

0:invalid

1:valid

0、1 0 ○

Multifunctional Input terminal(H1.01.~H1.07.)

Set

Value Function

Explanation

5 UP Instruction Next terminal must be DOWN instruction

6 DOWN Instruction Previous terminal must be UP instruction

Page 180: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Set Parameters According to the Function

7- 53

Setting and Using Cautions Pay attention to the followings during the setting and using of UP/DOWN instruction.

Setting Cautions

If only one of the UP/DOWN instructions is set in the multifunctional terminal X3~X9,the confliction alarming(OPE3) of terminal setting will happened.

Using Cautions

Under the use of UP/DOWN instruction, the drive will accelerate to lower limit of frequency instruction afer input of the operating instruction.

Muti speed range operating is invalid under the use of UP/DOWN instruction.

Wiring Connection Examples and Time Sequence Diagram The followings are the setting example and time sequence when the multifunctional input terminal X3 is UP instruction , X4 is the DOWN instruction..

Figure 7.37 Wiring Connection examples of UP/DOWN instruction

Figure 7.38 Time Sequence of UP/DOWN Instruction

Page 181: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Set parameters according to the function

7- 54

Keep the Analog Frequency at Any Time

If set H1.01.~H1.07.(select input terminal X3~X8 multifunctional connector) as

17(lock of analog setting/keep), the analog frequency instruction of 100ms from ON

Are kept and carried out according to this frequency.

Multifunctional Input setting(H1.01.~H1.07.)

Set

Value Function Explanation

17 Lock and keep of analog set value Do not set

Figure 7.39 Lock and keep of analog set

Setting and Using Cautions Pay attention to the followings during the setting and using of lock/keep instruction.

Setting Cautions

The set of lock/keep can not be used along with the following instructions, or there will be setting conflict alert(OPE3).

UP/DOWN instruction positive and negtive speed instruction

Using Cautions

Keep the instruction above 100ms when implement set analog lock/keep. The frequency

instruction will not be kept if the instruction time is below 100ms.

The analog frequency instruction will be cut off when power is off.

Page 182: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Set Parameters According to the Function

7- 55

Co-rotating and Reversing jogging instruction

The co-rotating and reversing inching instruction is to run the inverter under inching

instruction by the terminal action of ON/OFF.Do not input operating instruction if the

co-rotating and reversing inching instruction is started.

Set any of H1.01~H1.07 as 7(co-rotating instruction)or 8(reversing inching frequency).

Related Parameter control mode

Parameter

NO.

Name

content Setting

range

factory

setting

storage

method V/F

Sensor

less

vector

non-

Synchronous

PG vector

non-

Synchronous

PG magnetic

flux

synchronous

PG vector

Synchronous

PG

magnetic

flux

D1.09.

jogging

frequency

Frequency instruction when

Multifunctional input

terminal ”multi speed range

instruction 4 ” is on.

0.00~300.00 6.00Hz ◎ × × × × × ×

Note:The display unit can be set by parameter 02.04(unit selection of frequency instruction).Factory

setting is 0(0.01Hz is the unit).

Multifunctional Input Terminal(H1.01~H1.07) Set

Value Function Explanation

7 co-rotating inching

instruction

8 reversing inching

instruction

Connect related multifuctional input terminal and no operating instruxtion is needed. The

drive can co-rorate and reverse as the inching frequency(D1.09).The inching instruction is

superior to any other instruction sources.

Using Cautions The inching frequency which is input by co-rorating and reversing inching instruction is supior

to any other instruction sources. When both the co-rotating and revering instructions are ON 500ms above, the drive will stop

operation according to the set of B1.03(selection of stop mode)

Page 183: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Set parameters according to the function

7- 56

Stop the Drive by Warning of Peripheral equipment failure

(function of external fault)

Multifunctional Input Terminal Set

Value Function Explanation

20 External fault The drive will stop when ON and alarm for the peripheral failure.

External failure function is to actuate the connector output(MA-MC,MB-MC) and stop the

drive when there are peripheral failures.

When use the function of external failure, Please set H1.01~H1.07 as 2o(external

failures).

■ Monitoring

Monitoring of the analog value

Related Parameters control mode

Parameter

NO.

Name

content setting

range

factory

setting

storage

method V/F

non-

synchronous

PG vector

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

magnetic

flux

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

Synchr

-onous

PG

magnetic

flux

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

H4.01. Monitoring item

of terminal FM

Set monitoring case number from

multifunctional analog output

terminal(from U1.01.~U1.09 .part

selection of 01~09)

1~17 0 ☆ × × × × × ×

H4.02. Output gain of

terminal FM

Set output voltage gain from

multifunctional analog output

terminal FM

0.0~1000.0 100.0% ☆ × × × × × ×

H4.03. Output deviation

of terminal FM

Set the ouput voltage deviation from

multifunctional analog output terminal

FM

-100.0~100.0 0.0 ☆ × × × × × ×

Page 184: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Set Parameters According to the Function

7- 57

H4.04. Monitoring item

of terminal AM

Set monitoring case number from

multifunctional analog output

terminal(from U1.01.~U1.09 .part

selection of 01~09)

1~17 0 ☆ × × × × × ×

H4.05. Output gain of

terminal AM

Set the ouput voltage gain from

multifunctional analog output terminal

AM

0.0~1000.0 100.0% ☆ × × × × × ×

H4.06. Output deviation。

of terminal AM

Set the ouput voltage deviation from

multifunctional analog output terminal

AM

-100.0~100.0 0.0 ☆ × × × × × ×

Select Analog Value Monitoring Case The case of monitoring FM-FC and AM-FC output digital manipulator from analog value

monitoring terminals.[U*.**(state monitoring)]。

Please refer to chapter 4 for details.

Adjust Analog Value Monitoring Please use the following parameters to adjust the output voltage of analog value input terminals FM-FC,AM-FC. H4.02.:output gain of terminal FM H4.05.:output gain of terminal AM H4.03.:output deviation of terminal FM H4.06.:output deviation of terminal AM

Voltage Correction of Analog Value

In the stop of drive, the following voltage correction of analog value can be reached by the gains and deviation parameters. Output voltage of corrected analog interface FM/AM: Actual output analog value% * 10V *output

gain% + output deviation.

Figure 7.40 Gain and Deviation of Analog Output

Page 185: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Set parameters according to the function

7- 58

Monitoring Mark

Related Paremeters

ParametersNO.

Name

Content Minimal

Unit

Code

Selection

U2.01. Terminal State Terminal ON/OFF state

~ 12

U2.02 Extended terminal state Extended terminal ON/OFF state

12

U2.09 Encoder UVW phase sequence Present UVW state

1 13

U2.13. Operation state Present Operation state 20

U4.10 Terminal State Terminal State when fault 24

U4.14. operation state when fault Present operation state when fault ~ U4.10.

U4.15. ASR state when fault Present ASR State when fault ~ U4.13.

Monitoring of Input/output Terminal The state of input/output interface can be monitored in parameters U2.01 and U2.02.The

nearest fault can be memorized by monitoring parameters U4.10 as followinged:

the different LED dispay indicates the ON state of related input/output interface.

Figure 7.41 Monitoring of Input/Output terminals state

Mark monitoring of operation state The present running state can be monitered by parameter U2.13 and the ASR state of

nearest fault by U4.13 as follows: the different displays of LED indicate different states.

BIT7 BIT6 BIT5 BIT4 BIT3 BIT2 BIT1 BIT0

running Base

closure

on

Starting

up closure

on

Excitation Self-learning fault Acceleration

with current

limit to stop

Deceleration

with current

limit

Page 186: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Set Parameters According to the Function

7- 59

Figure7.42 State Monitoring when fault

Mark monitoring of ASR State The ASR state of nearest fault can be monitored by parameter U4.14 as followed. The

different displays of LED indicate different states.

BIT7 BIT6 BIT5 BIT4 BIT3 BIT2 BIT1 BIT0

Acceleration/

deceleration

Fixed/changing

speed

Zero

speed/not

zero

speed

Non-zero-servo/

Zero-servo

Non-zero-torque/

Zero-torque

Reach/changing

acceleration

Acceleration

Increased/decreased

Deceleration

To stop

In the

same

frequency

Figure 7.43 Monitoring of ASR state

Monitoring of UVW state When driving a Permanent magnet synchronous motor,use U2.09 to monitor the UVW phase of motor .When it shows in order 5-4-6-2-3-1 or 1-3-2-6-4-5,that is correct;if not, please check the PG wiring and motor.

Page 187: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Set parameters according to the function

7- 60

■ Spical function

The use of special functions are introduced in this section.

Torque Compensation Function

Drive realize the torque compensation function by setting related parameters.

Related Parameters control mode

Parameter

NO.

Name

content setting

range

factory

setting

storage

method V/F

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

magnetic

flux

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

Synchr

-onous

PG

Magnetic

flux

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

J2.01. compensation mode

of torque deviation

0: no compensation

1: switching value compensation

2: analog value F2 input

compensation

0,1,2 0 ☆ × × ○ ○ ○ ○

J2.02. Compensation torque

of cororandam braking

Set compensation torque

of motor’s corotational braking0.0%~100.0% 0.0% ○ × × ○ ○ ○ ○

J2.03. Compensation torque

of back running driving

Set Compensation torque of back

running drive 0.0%~100.0% 0.0% ○ × × ○ ○ ○ ○

J2.04. Compensation torque

of cororandam driving

Set Compensation torque

of cororandam driving 0.0%~100.0% 0.0% ○ × × ○ ○ ○ ○

J2.05. Compensation torque

of back running braking

Set Compensation torque of

back running braking 0.0%~100.0% 0.0% ○ × × ○ ○ ○ ○

J2.06

Direction of torque

Compensation when

starting

Set direction of

torque compensation 0,1 1 ○ × × ○ ○ ○ ○

Page 188: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Set Parameters According to the Function

7- 61

Multifunctional Input Terminals(H1.01.~H1.07.)

Set Value Function Explanation

13 Deviation of light torque

14 Deviation of heavy torque

Use external weighing equipment to set compensation scontrol of elevator. 13,14

must be set simutaneously.

Start of Switching Weighing Torque Compensation(J2.01.=1)

Three kinds of load can have torque compensation by combining operating direction and input signal of weighing switch. In order to switch these frequency instruction, please select form mulfunctional input setting of multi-speed range 1~3 and inching frequency.(H1.01~H1.08)

J2.02.:torque compensation of no load up run

J2.03.:torque compensation of no load down run

J2.04.:torque compensation of full load up run

J2.05.:torque compensation of full load down run

Figure 7.44 Weighing Compensation of Switch Value

Page 189: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Set parameters according to the function

7- 62

Start of analog Weighing Torque Compensation(J2.01.=2)

Different kinds of load can have torque compensation by combining operating direction and input signal of weighing analog. The following figure shows the compensating torque of analog input voltage when input analog terminal F2-FC as weighing compensation input.

J2.02.:torque compensation of no load up run

J2.03.:torque compensation of no load down run

J2.04.:torque compensation of full load up run

J2.05.:torque compensation of full load down run

Figure 7.45 Weighing Compensation of analog Value

Timer Function

Take multifunctional input terminals X3~X8 as input terminal of timing function,take multifunctional output terminals M1-M2、Y1-YC、Y2-YC as output terminal of timing function; set relay time.Then it can be used as timer function.

Set H1.01.~H1.07. as 22(timing function input) Set H2.01.~H2.04. as 11(timing function output)

Page 190: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Set Parameters According to the Function

7- 63

Related Parameters control mode

Parameter

NO.

Name

content setting

range

factory

setting

storage

method V/F

non-

Synchronous

PG vector

non-

Synchronous

PG

Magnetic

flux

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

Synchr

-onous

PG

magnetic

flux

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

J3.01. ON delay time

of timer 1

the input timer function with unit

second, set ON delay time for timer

output

0.0~300.0 0.0S ☆ × × × × × ×

J3.02. OFF delay time

of timer 1

The input timer function with unit

second, set OFF delay time for timer

output

0.0~300.0 0.0S ☆ × × × × × ×

J3.03. ON delay time

of timer 2

The input timer function with unit

second, set ON delay time for

timer output

0.0~300.0 0.0S ☆ × × × × × ×

J3.04. OFF delay time

of timer2

the input timer function with unit

second, set OFF delay time for

timer output

0.0~300.0 0.0S ☆ × × × × × ×

Examples for Setting Timing function output is ON when ON time is longer than set value of J3.01. Timing function output is OFF when OFF time is longer than set value of J3.02. The following shows the time sequence of timer function(timer 1):

Figure 7.46 Timer sequence

Zero Servo Function

Stop state of motor (zero servo state,keeping torque)can be kept by zero servo function.The position is locked in PG vector control mode. Set anyone of parameters H1.01.~H1.07.(function selection of multifunctional input terminals X3~X8) as 19, the ON state of Input terminal is zero servo effective. When the servo instruction is ON, and the frequency(speed) instruction reached below zero speed threshold, the zero servo function is set.

Page 191: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Set parameters according to the function

7- 64

Related Parameters control mode

Parameter

NO.

Name

content setting

range

factory

setting

storage

method V/F

Sensor

less

vector

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

non-

Synchr

-onous PG

magnetic

flux

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

Synchr

-onous

PG

magnetic

flux

E5.18. 0Hz Current gain 0Hz proportion gain of current

loop 0~150 50% ○ ○ ○ ○ × ○ ×

J1.01. Frequency of Zero speed

threshold value

while deceleration-stop , set the

starting frequency of DC

braking with unit Hz

0.01~2.50 0.50Hz ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Multifunctional Input Terminals(H1.01.~H1.07.)

Set Value Function Explanation

19 Zero servo instruction ON Zero servo state of motor is kept when ON

Multifunctional Output Terminals(H2.01.~H2.04.)

Set Value Function Explanation

22 On zero servo state ON:drive is in zero servo state

Page 192: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Set Parameters According to the Function

7- 65

Time Sequence The following is the time sequence of zero servo function.

Figure 7.47 Time Sequence of Zero Servo Control

Using Cautions Use the zero servo function when operating is ON. If the operating instruction is OFF,

the force of motor zero servo is not generated.

Adujust the keep torque of zero servo by current gain(E5.18).The keeping force increases

when increasing the set value.But the over keeping force will lead to the oscillation

or vibration of motor.Adjust current gain after adjusting of ASR control gain.

Set zero servo instruction as OFF, the state output of drive zero servo is OFF.

In zero servo function, Please avoid long time using of zero servo interlock.Operating

with 100% load will become the reason of malfunction. If long time of zero servo

interlock is needed, please set current gain of zero servo interlock as 50% rated

current of drive, or increase the drive capacity.

importance

Page 193: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Set parameters according to the function

7- 66

■ Function of digital operator The function of digital manipulator is explained in this section.

Set the Function of digtal operator In the parameters of digital operator,the function of the key and display selection

can be set.

Related Parameters control mode

Parameter

NO.

Name

content setting

range

factory

setting

storage

method V/F

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

magnetic

flux

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

Synchr

-onous

PG

magnetic

flux

non-

Synchr

-Onous

PG

vector

O1.01. function of stop key

function of stop key is set by external terminals

into operation instruction.

0: invalid

1: valid

0,1 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

O1.02. function of

operation key

Set the function of operation key when

input operating instruction to operator

0:Forward 1:reverse

0,1 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

O1.03.

Function of gived

frequency by up

and down key

Set the function of up and down key when

input operating instruction to operator

0: invalid of adding or deleting

frequency instruction

1: valid of adding or deleting frequency

instruction

0、1 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

O2.01. Setup of commonly used

Monitering item 1

Select the monitoring content

of commonly used item 1 0~15 1 ○ × × × × × ×

O2.02. Setup of commonly

used monitering item 2

Select the monitoring content

of commonly used item2 0~15 2 ○ × × × × × ×

O2.03. Setup of commonly

used monitering item3

Select the monitoring content

of commonly used item 3 0~15 5 ○ × × × × × ×

O2.04. selection of

frequency unit Set the unit of frequency instruction 0~39999 0 ☆ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

O2.05. Display mode of motor

position

0: PG input pulse value

1: motor angle 0、1 0 ☆ × × ○ ○ ○ ○

Page 194: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Set Parameters According to the Function

7- 67

Set the stop Function of Stop (o1.01)

When external operating instruction(B1.01.=1) is input, set O1.01.=1, the stop function

ofStop

in the operator is the seleced mode of B1.03(stop mode selection).

WhenO1.01=0, The stop function of Stop

in the operator is invalid.

Set the Operating Function of Stop (o1.02)

Set operating instruction is input by operator(B1.01=0), set O1.02.=0, the Stop

in the

operator is co-rotating enabled function.

Set operating instruction is input by operator(B1.01.=0), set O1.02=1, Stop

in the

operator is reversing enabled function.

Function of frequency gived by Up/Down Key Set frequency instruction is input by operator(B1.02=0).

Set O1.03.=0, The frequency instruction can be set by first pressENTER

, then set frequency by

or and keep the savings by ENTER

.

Set O1.03.=1, and then Set operating instruction is input by operator, the frequency

instruction can be set by or (increase or decrease).

In 0Hz, after input the operating instruction.If keeping on pressing or , the frequency

instruction will increase or decrease as the setting of C1.01/C1.02.Its starting and stopping process are restrained by acceleration and deceleration corner time (C2.).

Set Cautions(when O1.03.=1)

The set frequency instruction will be recorded immediately when release the key and key

and not effected by corner.

If the frequency need to be reset, please press ENTER

first and change by pressing and .

Common Monitoring Case when power on(O2.01. ,O2.02., O2.03.)

Use O2.01.~O2.03 to set the 3 common monitoring items in the digital operator(related to the selection code of U1 and U2). Refer to chapter 10 for details.

Page 195: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Set parameters according to the function

7- 68

Change the Unit of Frequency Instruction(O2.04.)

Use O2.04, to set the unit of frequency instruction of digital operator. The parameter can be changed by O2.04 are:

U1.01.(target frequency) U1.02.(output frequency) U1.03.(feedback frequency) D1.01.~D1.09.(frequency instruction)

Set parameter 02.04

When O2.04.=0; the unit of frequency instruction is 0.01Hz; When O2.04.=1,the unit of frequency instruction is 0.01%; When O2.04.=2,the unit of frequency instruction is RPM 100~39999:user can set the needed set/display value in maximal output frequency

Set the four digit out of the radix point

Set the digit back of the radix point e.g. In the maximal output frequency, if need to display 2000.0, set 12000.

Display mode of motor position(O2.05.)

When O2.05.=0,display value of U2.06 is PG input pulse value, the value is four times the frequency of PG pulse value.

When O2.05.=1,display value of U2.06 is motor angle value , is the related angle value of phase Z correction pulse.

Page 196: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Set Parameters According to the Function

7- 69

Parameter Set Processing

The section explains the reading and writting of parameter set.

Function Inside E2PROM(Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory) used in digital operator can realize the following functions.

Read the parameter set from drive to E2PROM (CO.01) in digital operator. Write the parameter set from E2PROM in digital operator to drive(PA.01).

Operating Process

The parameter should be processed, press ESC

and ENTER at the same time to enter operating

processing mode. Select the processing mode by and .

When choosing CO.01,read the parameter set from drive to E2PROM (CO.01) in digital operator and carry out counting relay of 0~100, the read and write process is over when the counting completes.

When choosing PA.01,write the parameter set from E2PROM in digital operator to drive(PA.01) and carry out counting relay of 0~100, the read and write process is over when the counting complete.

After the operating , press and at the same time to log out the parameter set

processing mode.

Setting Note: The setting mode of parameter set processing please refer to chapter 3.

Related Alarm Parameters Alarm Display Content Reason

parameters error

inside the operator

No content inside the operator

Parameters not complete inside the operator

operator error in

writing parameter set

Carry out writing parameter set function during

motor running

Page 197: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Set parameters according to the function

7- 70

Setting Code

The drive is protected by three code degree, they are OP1, OP2 and OP8; the upper degree

can decode the parameter set by jumping over lower degree code, and operate more

parameters after the decoding.

Explanation The incorrect code will disable the revising of related patameter. Usually:

OP8 is the factory code of the drive. Unable to revise and public. OP2 is customer code. Can be revised and public to customer. OP1 is the end user code. Can be revised and public to end user.

Setting Note: Refer to chapter 3 to set the code.

Page 198: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Set Parameters According to the Function

7- 71

■ PG signal detection The section explains PG signals of drive detection.

Carry out PG Speed Control

Related Patameters control mode

Parameter

NO.

Name

content setting

range

factory

setting

storage

method V/F

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

magnetic

flux

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

Synchr

-onous

PG

magnetic

flux

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

H5.01. PG pulse number pulse number each circle using PG 0~20000 1024 ☆ × × ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎

H5.02. PG filtering time Filtering time for PG signal 1.0~25.0 3mS ☆ × × ○ ○ ○ ○

H5.03. Phase sequence of PG

0: Phase A lead when motor is

co-rotating

1: Phase B lead when motor

is co-rotating

0,1 0 ☆ × × ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎

H5.05. Output frequency

dividing ratio Set PG pulse output frequency dividing ratio 1~64 4 ☆ × × × × × ×

H5.06. Function of phase Z

0: invalid

1: pulse input

2: phase Z correction(high electrical level)

3. phase Z correction(Low electrical level)

0,1,2,3 0 ☆ × × ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎

H5.07. Offset electrical angel

of encoder 0.0~359.9 0.0 ☆ × × × × ◎ ◎

H5.10. C+/C-Reverse 0: invalid

1: valid 0,1 0 ☆ × × ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎

H5.11. Output frequency

dividing ratio Set PG pulse output frequency dividing ratio 1~64 4 ☆ × × × × × ×

L4.01. Stall prevention

function

Action selection of motor stall:

0: invalid

1: valid

0,1 1 ○ × × ○ ○ ○ ○

L4.02. Threshold frequency

of stall pretection %

Set threshold protection of stall between

feedback speed and instruction with unit

%. The highest frequency is set as 100%

1~50 10% ○ × × ○ ○ ○ ○

L4.03. protection time

of stall

Set protection time of over speed deviation

with unit by second 0.01~2.50 0.50S ○ × × ○ ○ ○ ○

Page 199: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Set parameters according to the function

7- 72

control mode

Parameter

NO.

Name

content setting

range

factory

setting

storage

method V/F

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

magnetic

flux

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

Synchr

-onous

PG

magnetic

flux

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

L4.04. Over speed protection

Action selection of motor’s over speed

0: invalid

1: valid

0,1 1 ○ × × ○ ○ ○ ○

L4.05.

Threshold value of

over speed protection

Set threshold value of over speed protection

with unit %. The highest frequency is set as

100%

1~120 105% ○ × × ○ ○ ○ ○

L4.06. time protection of over

speed

Set time protection of over speed with unit

second 0.01~2.50 0.5 ○ × × ○ ○ ○ ○

L5.01. PG protecting function

of PG disconnection

0: invalid

1: valid 0,1 1 ○ × × ○ ○ ○ ○

L5.02. wrong phase protection 0: invalid

1: valid 0,1 0 ○ × × ○ ○ ○ ○

L5.03. protection function

of Phase Z rectifying

0: invalid

1: free slide to stop

2: deceleration-stop

3: abnormal deceleration-stop

4: warning

0,1,2,3,4 0 ○ × × ○ ○ ○ ○

L5.04. Threshold of phase Z

rectifying error 0.1~25 0.5° ☆ × × ○ ○ ○ ○

L5.05.

Protecting times for

Phase Z rectifying

error

When error pulse reached threshold value,

the drive will carry on phase Z wrong

correcting protection(show JE) 1~100 3 ○ × × ○ ○ ○ ○

Page 200: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Set Parameters According to the Function

7- 73

Interoduction to PG Signals A, B, Z phase pulse(differentiate pulse input) maximal input frequency 250KHz; A, B phase

monitoring output(PG power source output +5V maximum current 200mA) , related to linear drive.

Note:Select proper pulse output mode by setting parameter H5.04(A/B pulse,

PLUG/SIGN pulse or CW/CCW pulse)

Set PG Pulse Number Set PG(pulse generator/encoder) pulse number as the unit p/r. Set the pulse in H5.01

which equals to the pulse number of motor rotating for one round.

Compare PG with Rotating Direction of Motor H5.03 is the parameter for compare PG and motor rotating direction. When the motor is co-rotating, the PG output is phase A leading or phase B leading(H5.03=0/1). When PG is clockwise(CW) rotating looking from the input axis, it is phase A leading. Motor is counter clockwise rotating from output side when co-rotating output. However, from common PG, when the motor is co-rotating, it is phase A leading when installed in load side, phase B leading in opposite of load side.

Figure 7.48 PG Rotating Direction Setting

Page 201: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Set parameters according to the function

7- 74

Set the Frequency Dividing Ratio of PG Pulse Monitoring Output By setting parameters H5.04(frequency dividing mode) and H5.05(frequency dividing ratio), The frequency dividing ratio and mode of PG pulse monitoring output can be set.

Monitoring output pulse=PG output pulse/frequency dividing ratio The set range of frequency dividing(H5.05) is 1~64. e.g.:When frequency dividing ratio is 1/2(H5.05=2), half of the PG ouput pulse number are monitoring pulse.

Checking out PG Wiring Disconnection When A2.01=2/3/4/5,if not received the PG pulse signal when inputing operating instruction and frequency instruction to drive,check out the PG disconnection(PGO) alarm.

Checking out PG Phase Error When A2.01=2/3/4/5,receive the reversed feedback torque signal when the input of operating instruction and frequency instruction of drive is positive. Check out PG phase error (PGE) alarm.

PG self-checking Fault When A2.01=4/5,not reveive feedback UVW phase signals when inputting the operating instruction and frequency instruction. Check out PG self-checking fault(PGF)alarm.

Checking out Motor Over Speed Checking out over speed(OS1) alarm when motor exceed the over speed protecting threshold(L4.05) and exceed the over speed protection time(L4.06).

Checking out the speed difference of the motor rotating speed and

speed instruction

If the speed difference(the diffenerce between motor practical speed and instruction speed) is too large, the checking out of over speed difference(OS2)will alarm. After the checking out of constant speed, If the speed difference above the the over speed protecting threshold(L4.02) and more than its protecting time(L4.03), the over speed difference(OS2)will alarm.

Page 202: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Set Parameters According to the Function

7- 75

■ Supplement

Zero Speed Signal Introduce the output precondition and state of zero speed signal.

Related Parameters control mode

Parameter

NO.

Name

content setting

range

factory

setting

storage

method V/F

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

magnetic

flux

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

Synchr

-onous

PG

magnetic

flux

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

J1.01. Zero speed threshold

value

while deceleration-stop , set the

starting frequency of DC braking

with unit Hz

0.01~2.50 0.50Hz ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Multifunctional Output Terminals(H2.01.~H2.04.)

Set

Value Function

Explanation

2 Zero speed ON:zero speed

Output State

The output terminal is zero speed when the multifunctional output terminal is set as 2. Referring to ouput frequency, the ON/OFF of output terminal is as Figure 6.70

Figure 7.49 Zero Speed Signal

Page 203: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Set parameters according to the function

7- 76

Speed Consistant Signal

The precondition and state of speed consistant signal are introduced.

Related Parameters control mode

Parameter

NO.

Name

content setting

range

factory

setting

storage

method V/F

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

magnetic

flux

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

Synchr

-onous

PG

magnetic

flux

non-

Synchr

-onous

PG

vector

J1.02.

Frequency detecting

value of Speed

consistency

during the multifunctional

output set” randam frequency

consistency”, set the frequency

with the unit Hz

0.00~300.00 0.00Hz ○ × × × × × ×

J1.03.

Frequency detecting

amplitude value of Speed

consistent

During the state of “ frequency

consistency”,”randam

frequency consistancy”,set the

amplitude with the unit Hz

0.10~20.00 2.00Hz ○ × × × × × ×

Multifunctional Output Terminal(H2.01.~H2.04.)

Set

Value Functin

Explanation

3 Frequency consistance ON:testing amplitude J1.03.

4

Any frequency

consistance

ON:output frequency=±J1.02.,testing amplitude J1.03.

Page 204: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Set Parameters According to the Function

7- 77

Output State The function of output terminal is speed consistence when the multifunctional output are set as 3. Refer to output frequency when open loop, while refer to feedback frequency when close loop. The ON/OFF of the output terminal is as followed:

Figure 7.50 Time Sequence of Speed Consistence Signal

The function of output terminal is any speed consistence when the multifunctional output setting is 4. The ON/OFF of the output terminal is showed as followed:

Figure 7.51 Time Sequence of any Speed consistence

Page 205: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Maintaining·Checking This chapter explained the basic maintenance and checking items.

■Maintaining·Checking......................................8-1

8

Page 206: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Maintaining Checking

8-1

■Maintaining·Checking

Guarantee Period The guarantee period of the drive is as followed. Guarantee period: 18 months after leaving factory or 1 year after delivery to end users.

Routine Checking

In system action state, please confirm the following items. ·motor has no abnormality or vibration. ·No abnormal heating ·Environment temperature is not high ·Display of output current monitoring is not larger than normal value ·The cooling fan installed in the side is working normally.

Regular Checking

In regular checking, please confirm the following items. Make sure to cut off the power source before checking and 5 minutes after the LED lamp in the operator is off. If to touch the terminals right after the power off, there is danger of electric shock.

Table 8.1 regular checking case

Checking Items Checking Content Countermeasure for Malfunction

whether the screw is loose Screw up Cabling terminals ,

installed unit screw,

connector, etc whether the connector is loose Connect again

Heat sink whether accumulating dust Clean with the dry air whose pressure is 9.2×104~

58.8×104Pa(4~6kg*c㎡)

Printed Board whether adhere dust and oil

Clean with the dry air whose pressure is 39.2×104~

58.8×104Pa(4~6kg* c㎡). If failed, please change

printed board.

Cooling Fan

Whether has abnormal noise,

abnormal vibration or exceed the

accumulated time 20,000 hours.

Replace cooling fan

Power Components whether accumulating dust Clean with the dry air whose pressure is 39.2×104~

58.8×104Pa(4~6kg* c㎡)

Filtering Electrolytic

Capacitor

whether abnormal like color

changing or smelly Replace electrolytic capacitor or drive

Page 207: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Maintaining Checking

8-2

Regular Maintenance of Components and Parts

Drive is composed with many components and parts. Depending on the normal operating of them, the function is completed. Electronic components need to be maintained according to the application conditions. After long period operation, maintaining and changing of them according to the duration of service is necessary. The time limits are different because of different installing environment and using conditions. The following table records some time limits of drive components. Please do regular maintenance according to the table.

Table8.2 Time Limit of Components Name of Components Standard replacing time* Replacing Method and Other

Cooling fan 2~3 years Replace new fan

Filtering electrolytic

capacitor 5 years Replace new capacitor(decide after checking)

Braking relay - Decide after checking

Fuse 10 years Replace new fuse

Capacity of

the printed board 5 years Replace new printed board(decide after checking)

* The above terms are based on standard environment:

·Surrounding temperature: yearly average 30℃

·Load ratio: below 80%

·Operating time: less than 12 hours/day

Page 208: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Specification This chapter explains the standard specification of drive body, its options and peripherals.

■Specification ..............................................9-1

■Specification of Options·peripherals ......................9-5

9

Page 209: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Specification

9-1

■Specification

The following table indicates the standard specification of drive.

Specification of Drive Type

The following shows the capacity specification of different types.

Table 9.1 400V class capacity specification

Type IMS-L380-□ 45P5 47P5 4011 4015 4018 4022 4030 4037 4045

Drive Capacity Code 45P5 47P5 4011 4015 4018 4022 4030 4037 4045

Maximal Motor Power for

Application (KW) 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45

Output Power(KVA) 11 16 21 26 32 40 50 61 74

Rated Output Current(A) 15 21 27 34 42 52 65 80 91

(W) 1600 2500 3000 4000 5000 6000 9000 12800 16000

60 60 45 30 30 20 15 13.6 11 Selection of Braking

Resistance (Ω) 43 43 43 30 30 15 11 10 10

Selection of Breaker(A) 20 30 50 60 75 100 100 100 150

Selection of Contactor(A) 20 20 30 50 50 50 80 80 100

(A) 15 20 30 50 60 80 100 120 160 Selection of Filter

(mH) 1.42 1.06 0.7 0.42 0.36 0.26 0.24 0.18 0.16

Note: * indicates that the data is not usually used. Please contact factory if needed.

Page 210: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Specification

9-2

Common Specification

Table 9.2 Common Specification of different Types

Item Specification

Main Circuit Mode Voltage Source Sinusoidal Wave PWM (Allowed fluctuation range:+15%~-17%)

Inductive Non Synchronous Motor:Current/magnetic flux vector control, sensorless vector control, V/F

control Motor Control Mode

PMSM:Current/magnetic flux vector control

2P:60000r/min

4P:30000r/min Highest

rotating speed

converting as

output frequency:

1000HZ 6P:20000r/min

Vector Control 1:1000(Using 1024P/R PG, converting as 4p, lowest speed~basic speed is 1.5

~1500rpm ) Control Range

V/F Control 1:100(constant torque: constant power)

Vector Control 100HZ(Maximum) Control

Response sensorless vector

control 20HZ(Maximum)

Analog Setting:±0.1% of highest speed(25±10℃) Vector Control

Digital Setting:±0.05% of highest speed(-10~50℃)

Analog Setting:±0.5% of highest speed(25±10℃)

Control

Accuracy sensorless vector

control Digital Setting:±0.5% of highest speed(-10~50℃)

Set Resolution 0.03% of highest speed

Key Operation: FWD/RWD running(accelerating, decelerating), STOP key. Running

Operation Input Signal: Co-rotating instruction, reversing instruction, reset instruction, instruction selecting

of multi speed range, etc.

Key operation: Set by +, -

Potential Meter Setting: use Potential meter(3terminals: 1~5KΩ)

Analog Signal:0~±10V setting

UP/DOWN Control:external signal(signal DI)control the UP and Down of the speed during ON

Multi step speed instruction: Select 8 step operating speed by combining 3 external signal(signal

DI)

Pulse Signal:control with pulse signal(pulse A, B; Pulse+ direction; positive and negative pulse)

Tandem Connecting Operation: set by communication with build-in RS485/RS422 interface.CAN interface

Speed Setting

jogging Operation: Select jogging operation mode, run by signal of external terminal

Output Signal of Transistor: Operating, frequency checked out, torque restrain, base electrode

blocking, etc. Running State

Signal rotating speed, output voltage, torque, load factor, etc.

0.01~600S(4 settings for both accelerating and decelerating, selected by external signal) Accelerating

and celerating

Time (besides linear accelerating and decelerating, S accelerating and decelerating is also for selection)

Control

function

Speed Setting

Gain/Deviation ratio/deviation relationship between analog speed setting and rotating speed of motor

Page 211: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Specification

9-3

Item Specification

Jumping Speed Can set 2 jumping point and 1 jumping amplitude

Can restrain the output torque below the preset value(Can select the same or driving braking different

limit value in 4 quadrant) Torque Control

Limit value can be set by analog or external signal(2 class)( when vector control or sensorless vector

control)

Torque

Deviation

Terminal input OV(voltage), analog input% of different functions when 4mA(current), help to eliminate

zero drift.

Speed Limiting

Function Can limit the maximal speed in case of racing

UP/DOWN

Function By ON/OFF action of multifunctional input terminal, the drive frequency instruction can be adjusted.

Stop Action

Function

5 stop function: inertial-stop, decelerating-stop, time limited decelerating-stop, DC braking

inertial-stop and all area DC braking stop

PG Pulse Output

Function Frequency division output of PG signal

Observer

Function Load interference and vibration restrain

Torque

compensation

Weighing torque compensation

Special

Control

Mode

State

monitoring:

Target frequency, output frequency, feedback frequency, motor speed, output current,

output torque, output voltage, output power, DC voltage of main loop, heat sink

temperature, accumulating operating time

Terminal

monitoring:

Input/Output terminal state, expanding input/output terminal state, input analog

value of terminal F1, input analog value of terminal F2, input analog value of

terminal F3, input pulse value of PG/motor angle, deviate peak value of PG pulse,

regenerative braking duty ratio, running state Display

Monitoring

Parameters

Malfunction

Recording:

Malfunction recording 1, accumulated running time when malfunction recording 1,

Malfunction recording 2, accumulated running time when malfunction recording 2,

malfunction recording 3, accumulated running time when malfunction recording 3,

malfunction recording4, accumulated running time when malfunction recording 4,

malfunction recording 5, accumulated running time when malfunction recording 5.

Page 212: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Specification

9-4

Item Specification

present

malfunction

info recording:

Present malfunction record, frequency instruction of malfunction, output frequency

of malfunction, feedback frequency of malfunction, output current of malfunction,

instruction torque of malfunction, output voltage of malfunction, DC bus voltage

of malfunction, heat sink temperature of malfunction, input/output terminal state

of malfunction, expanding input/output state of malfunction, terminal F1 input

voltage of malfunction, running state of terminal F1 input voltage of malfunction,

running state of terminal F2 input voltage of malfunction, ASR state running state

of malfunction, assistant info during operating error

Parameter

Setting Display function code and data

Alarm

Parameter Nearly 200 alarm parameters can decide on the source of malfunction accurately and solve problems fast.

Overload

Protecting One minute of 150% rated output current(one minute of 120% when constant torque)

Over Current

Protecting Above 200% rated output current

Drive

Overheating Temperature of drive heat sink is higher than set value.

Over Voltage protect when main loop DC voltage above770V

Under Voltage protect when main loop DC voltage below 430V

Protecting

Over torque protection, failed attracting of DC contactor, abnormal braking protection, input phase lacking, output

phase lacking, external abnormality, over speed protection, stall protection when accelerating and decelerating, analog

disconnection protection, parameter setting error, etc.

Application

Environment In doors, without corrosive and flammable gas or dust, direct sunlight, etc.

Surrounding

Temperature -10~50℃

Surrounding

Humidity 5~90%RH no condensation of moisture

Altitude Below 3000m(for1001~3000m place, used by reducing the rated value.)

Vibration 2~9Hz:amplitude=3mm 9~20Hz:9.8m/S2

Reserving

Temperature -25~55℃

Environment

Reserving

Humidity 5~95%RH

RS485 Standard build in

RS422 Standard build in

MEMOBUS Standard build in Communication

CAN Standard build in

Page 213: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Specification

9-5

■Specification of Options·peripherals Followings are options and peripherals for drive, please select for purpose.

Table 9.3 Options and peripherals

Purpose Name Detailed Explanation

Protect Wiring of Drive

Breaker or Leakage

Current Breaker

The cabling of drive protector should be set in the power source

side. Select leakage current breaker with countermeasure of higher

harmonic

Protect from burning when

with braking resistance Magnetic Contactor

Set magnetic contactor to protect braking resistance from burning.

Make sure to install surge absorber when setting.

Stop the expanding of

switching impacting signal Surge Absorber

Absorb the impact wave from magnetic contactor and control-used

relay. Make sure to install surge absorber to magnetic contactor

and control-used relay which are around the drive.

Isolate input and output

signal

Isolator Used for isolate input and output signal of the drive, effective

to reducing inductive interference.

Improve the input power of

drive

DC reactor and AC

reactor

Used for the input power improving of drive. When used in big power

source capacity(above 600KVA), please set DC reactor and AC

reactor.

noise filter of

Input side

Connect to the input power source system of drive to reduce

connecting interference. Install close to the drive as possible.

Zero phase adjusting

reactor for reducing

radio interference

Connect to the input power source system of drive to reduce

connecting interference. Install close to the drive as possible.

Can be used in input side and output side.

Reduce the bad effect to

radio and controller by noise

filter

noise filter of

Output side

Connect to the input power source system of drive to reduce

connecting interference. Install close to the drive as possible.

Braking resistance Use resistant to consume the regenerative power of motor and

shorten the deceleration time(rate of utilization 3%ED)

Braking resistance

unit

Use resistant to consume the regenerative power of motor and

shorten the deceleration time(rate of utilization 10%ED) Stop mechanics in set time

Braking unit If shorten deceleration time of motor, can be used together with

braking resistance unit.

Operate drive from outside Extended wire for

digital operator

The wire is used for remote digital operator(below 10m)

*1. When use leakage current breaker, please select inductive current above 200mA and action time above 0.1second to

prevent false action, or the leakage current breaker with countermeasure for higher harmonics.

Page 214: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Appendix

This chapter includes the cautions of the drive, motor and its peripherals, as well as the cable interconnection examples and parameter setup table.

■Control Mode of L380......................................10-1

■Cautions of Using Drive...................................10-4

■Cautions of Using the Motor...............................10-7

■Examples of Interconnection...............................10-9

■Parameter Setting Table..................................10-17

10

Page 215: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Appendix

10-1

■Control Mode of L380

The control modes and advantages of L380.

The Control Modes and Advantages of L380

L380 has the following five control modes. Users can choose proper control mode for your purpose. Table 10.1 indicates the outline and characteristics of control modes.

Table10.1 outline and characteristics of control modes

control mode sensorless V/F control sensorless vector

control

magnetic flux

vector control

current vector

control

current vector

control of

PMSM

magnetic

vector control

of PMSM

parameter setting A2.01=0 A2.01=1 A2.01=2 A2.01=3 A2.01=4 A2.01=5

basic control

constant control of

voltage/frequency

proportion

current vector control

without sensor

magnetic flux

vector control with

sensor

current vector

control with sensor

current vector

control with

sensor

magnetic flux

vector

control

PG speed control card (options) unnecessary unnecessary necessary necessary necessary necessary

speed control range 1:40 1:100 1:1000 1:1000 1:1000 1:1000

eed control accuracy ±2~3% ±0.2% ±0.02% ±0.02% ±0.02% ±0.02%

speed response About 1Hz 5Hz 40Hz

maximal

output frequency

300Hz 300Hz 300Hz 300Hz rated frequency

of motor

Rated

frequency

of motor

basic

performances

start-up torque 150%/3Hz 150%/1Hz 150%/0Hz

Self-learning line to line resistor

(usually unnecessary)

rotary type, static type (the

static type is only for line

to line resistance)

rotary type, static

type (the static type

is only for line to

line resistance)

rotary type, static

type (the static type

is only for line to

line resistance)

position of

magnetic

pole

position of

magnetic pole

Torque limitation no

yes(except accelerating,

decelerating and not

reach the highest

frequency )

yes yes yes yes

Torque control no no yes yes yes yes zero servo control no no yes yes yes yes

speed

presumption(chec

king style)

searching of

instantaneous

velocity

yes(speed and rotary

direction presumption )

yes(speed and rotary

direction presumption )

yes(speed and

rotary direction

presumption )

yes(speed and

rotary direction

presumption )

yes(speed

and rotary

direction

presumption )

yes(speed and

rotary

direction

presumption )

Application

Functions

Automated

energy saving

control

yes yes yes yes yes yes

Page 216: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Appendix

10-2

1. Variable range of control (consider the temperature rising of motor if continuous operation)

2.the highest speed error (motor temperature is 25±10℃ when sensorless vector control )condition of rating load and stable load.

3. Reflect the tracing degree of real speed in the range of motor torque insaturation according to the speed instruction of sine wave.

4. The motor’s torque during start-up and the frequency output. 5. Limit the maximal torque for the safety of mechanics and loads. 6. Control the torque and the rotary direction of motor. 7. No outside position controller, easy to realize position control (servo lock) function. 8. Speed and rotary direction of transience presuming (check), it is the no malfunction fast start-up. 9. With light load, the auto adjusting of additional voltage can exert the maximum motor efficiency.

■Cautions of the application function

Pay attention to the followings when use application function: If the motor can be separated with mechanics in test running, please carry out rotary self-learning. If the characteristic of vector control is needed, you must adjust the control system without mechanical vibration. In addition, please comply with the regulation that the rating current of motor is 50% to 100% rating current of inverter. When search for instantaneous velocity of speed presuming, it is necessary to combine the drive and motor as1: 1. In addition, when the frequency below 130Hz, the motor must be the same class with the drive, or one class lower than drive. In constant velocity, if the motor speed is brought down by restraining the torque, they speed will not close to the lowest frequency or reverse.

Page 217: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Appendix

10-3

Control Mode of the Drive and Application Examples

The following are the example of drive control mode.

■ V/F Control (A2.01=0)

V/F control can be used for one drive to drive several motors.

Inverter

(Thermal relay)

M1

M2

M3

Diagram10.1 V/F control

■ Sensorless vector control (A2.01=1)

In sensorless vector control, high performance drive can be reached without speed sensor and PG connection can be omitted.

Inverter M1

Diagram10.2 Sensorless vector control

■ With PG Vector Control (A2.01=2, 3, 4, 5)

In PG vector control, controlling with PG feedback can reach high accuracy drive, and achieve high accuracy position control, zero speed control and torque control.

Interver

M

PG

PG speed control card Diagram 10.3 With PG vector control

Page 218: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Appendix

10-4

■Cautions of Using Drive

Introduce the selection, configuration, setup and attentions of drive.

Selection

Please pay attention to the followings when choose drive.

■ Reactor Configuration

When connecting drive to large capacity power transformer (larger than 600kVA), and switching capacitors, there will be high peak current in input power source, which could result in rectifier damage. Under this condition, please set up DC reactor or AC reactor (optional) to improve the efficiency of power source. In addition, when connect converter such as DC motor drive in the same power source system, look up to the following diagram to see if DC reactor or AC reactor is needed.

Diagram 10.4 Setting condition of reactor

■ Drive Capacity

When a drive is driving a special motor or some motors, the rating current of motor must be lower than rating output current, please select proper drive capacity.

■ Starting Torque

The starting torque of motor and accelerating characteristics are restrained from overload rating current of drive. Compared with common commercial used power source, the torque characteristic is of low value. If larger torque are needed, please select one class higher drive capacity or improve the capacity of motor and drive simultaneously.

■ Abnormal Stop

When the multifunction of the drive happens, the protective function will stop outputting, but the motor should not be stopped immediately. If the abnormal stop for necessary mechanical equipment is needed, please set up mechanical stop to keep the mechanics.

Page 219: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Appendix

10-5

Optional Parts for Special Purpose

Terminal B1, B2, BR, +, - and expanding card plug socket is especially for special purposed optional parts.

Do not connect the devices that are not belonged to the parts.

Configuration

Pay attention to the followings when configure the drive.

Mounting in Cabinet Please avoid the environment with oil, dust and other sestons. Install the drive in clean place or enclosed cabinet where sestons cannot get in. The environment temperature should be controlled in a certain range if it is installed in enclosure. The cooling method and mounting size should be specified. In addition, do not mount the drive on wood or other flammable materials.

Mounting Direction

Please mount vertically, wall hanging mounting.

Setting

Pay attention to the followings when set up the drive.

Upper limit According to the configuration of digital operator, it can reach the frequency of 1000Hz. The wrong setup will cause danger. Please use top limit setting function to setting upper limit. The maximal output frequency of factory setup is 50Hz.

DC limit The high DC voltage of brake action and long action time will cause more heat of the motor.

Acceleration and deceleration time The acceleration and deceleration time is decided by both motor and load torque of drive, as well as inertia torque (GD2/4). When the stall preventing function start, please prolong the acceleration or deceleration time. If the stall function has been started, please set the prolonged time as the starting time. If the acceleration and deceleration time need to be shorted, please enhance the capacity of the motor and the drive simultaneously.

Page 220: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Appendix

10-6

Use

Pay attention to the followings when carrying out wire connection and maintenance.

Connection Checking Make sure the connection sequence of the terminal is correct, connect the input power source with input terminals R, S, T and the power source of motor with the output terminals U, V, W; or the drive will be damaged.

■ Configuration of Magnetic Contactor

When set the magnetic contactor (MC), do not start and stop frequently in case of malfunction. The highest frequency is 30min a switch when switch ON/OFF with MC.

■ Maintenance and examination

After cut off the main loop power source, do not work until the CHARGE light is off. The remnant voltage of the capacitor will cause danger of electric shock.

Page 221: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Appendix

10-7

■Cautions of Using the Motor

The explanation of cautions about using the motor

the Existing Standardized Motor

The loss increased when using drive for motor than using industrial frequency source. Pay attention to the followings when using the standardized motor.

■ Low speed range

The cooling effect is limited in low speed range so the temperature of the motor is higher. When use the motor from other manufacturers, reduce load torque when low speed range. If the 100% continuous torque output is needed in low speed range, please consider using the frequency converter motor or vector special motor.

■ Insulation and Withstand Voltage

When the input voltage is high (above 440V) and the wiring distance is long, the insulation and withstand voltage must be taken into consideration. Contact us with the details.

■ Torque characteristics

The drive and the industrial frequency power source have different torque characteristics. Please confirm the torque characteristics of mechanical load.

■ Vibration

In IMS-L380 series drive control system, the vibration the motor vibration and commercial power source vibration have similar situation, but the vibration will be more intense in the following situations.

Generate Resonance with Mechanical System’s Natural Frequency Changing original invariable speed mechanics into variable speed mechanics will generate resonance.

Vibrating-proof rubber can be installed and “jump frequency” parameter (D3.**) in the prohibited frequency band can be set.

Remnant imbalance of the rotary body

Please pay great attention in high-speed band.

■ Noise

Noise is different as the change of carrier wave frequency. When the set carrier wave frequency value is high, the noise is almost the same as it is of commercial power source drive. But if the set is improper in high speed running, the motor will have obvious wind cutting noise during the operation.

Page 222: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Appendix

10-8

Application of special Motor

Pay attention to the followings while using special motor

■ Variable Pole Number Motor

The rating current is different from standard motors’, so please confirm the maximum motor current and select drive based on it. Switch the pole number after the motor stopped. The switch while rotating will lead to the act of regenerating over voltage or over current loop, the free slide of motor stopped.

■ Motor in Water

The rating current of motor is larger than standard current, so please pay attention to the selection of motor capacity. In addition, when the wire distance is long between motor and drive, the voltage of drive will decrease with the increased wire voltage drop, and the maximal torque of motor will decrease. At this time please increase the wire radius.

■ Explosion Proof Motor

When drive the voltage resist explosion proof motor, it is necessary to combine drive with motor to take explosion proof test. When drive the existing explosion proof motor, the test is still need to be carried out. So install the motor in safe place.

■ Gear Drive Motor

Because the lubrication method is different from the motor factory’s, the rotary range is different in continuous use. Especially lubricated by machine oil, it has the danger of being burned. In additional, if the motor is needed to run in high speed, please contact factory.

■ Synchronous Motor

The pickup current and rating current are larger than standard motor’s. Contact the factory when deciding on drive. During group control, switching ON/OFF between several motors will lead to out of synchronism.

■ Single-phase motor

Single-phase motor is not suitable for various speeds running of the drive. In the start-up method of electrolytic capacitor, it will generate higher harmonic current and may cause the damage of the electrolytic capacitor. Split phase start-up and repulsion start-up are not recommended, as they will lead to the act failure because of the inter centrifugal force switch, and finally resulted in burning out of the starting coil.

Power Driven Structure (reduction drive, belt, chain, etc.) When using machine oiled gearbox, variator and reduction drive, the machine oil effect will go bad in low speed continuous running. In high speed running, the system will generate noise, and the problems such as intension problem caused by the lifespan and centrifugal force.

Page 223: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Appendix

10-9

■Examples of Interconnection

Give wiring connection examples on connecting braking unit into main loop and using electro transistor in the input/output terminal of drives.

Use Braking resistance Unit

The following gives an example on using braking resistance unit.

*1、 Disable stall prevention during deceleration by setting L4.12.=“0” and using a Braking Resistor Unit. The motor may

not stop within the deceleration time if this setting is not changed.

Diagram10.5 wiring of using braking resistance unit

Page 224: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Appendix

10-10

Use Braking Unit and Braking resistance Unit

While using braking unit and braking resistance unit, if the braking resistance overheated, please use sequence controller to cut the power source of the drive.

*1、 Disable stall prevention during deceleration by setting L4.12.=“0” and using a Braking Resistor Unit. The motor may

not stop within the deceleration time if this setting is not changed.

Diagram 10.6 using braking unit or resistance unit

Page 225: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Appendix

10-11

Use Braking Unit (parallel connection)

The following indicates the connection example of braking unit (parallel connection).

R

S

T

|

1MCCB

T

R

MC

S

U

V

W

M

U

V

W

Forward Run/Stop

Reverse Run/stop

X1

X2

X33 4

External fault

Braking Unit

3 4

P+ PB

43

1

2

5

6

1

2

5

6

1 2

1 2

Thermal protector

Braking Unit2

Thermal switch

Braking Resistor

Unit

Thermal protector Braki

ng Resistor

Unit

MASTER

SLAVB

SLME

MASTER

+15

P

P B

P B

3 4

Level

det

ecto

r

(C type ground)

MA

MC

MB

Fault contact output

3-phase power340~420V

50/60Hz

2MCCB THRX OFF ON MC

MC MA

MC

TRX

TRX

TRX

SA

SA

SA

Thermal relay trip contact of braking

resistor unit

Thermal relay trip contact of motor cooling fan

1 2

MC

Note:1、For controlling power off by multi-functional input terminals,cut the heat protection of braking unit.

2、Disable stall prevention during deceleration by setting L4.12.=“0” and using a Braking Resistor Unit. The motor

may not stop within the deceleration time if this setting is not changed.

Diagram 10.7 using braking unit(parallel connection)

Page 226: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Appendix

10-12

Use Braking Unit (parallel of three resistanceunit)

The following indicates the connection example of using braking unit (parallel of three resistanceunit)

R

S

T

1MCCB

T

R

MC

S

U

V

W

M

U

V

W

3 43 4

P+ PB

(C type ground)

1 2

B

3-phase power340~420V

50/60Hz

2MCCB THRX OFF ON

MC

MC

SA

SA

SA

MC

TRX

TRX

TRX

MC MA

Note:1、For controlling power off by multi-functional input terminals,cut the heat protection of braking unit.

2、 Disable stall prevention during deceleration by setting L4.12.=“0” and using a Braking Resistor Unit. The motor may not stop within the deceleration time if this setting is not changed.

Diagram 10.8 Using Braking Unit (parallel of three resistanceunit)

Page 227: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Appendix

10-13

Using electro transistor to input signal of 0V common point/common emitter mode

When use the +24V inside power source,. Input signals are connected in NPN transistor.(0V common point/common emitter mode)

Diagram 10.9 0V common point/common emitter mode

Page 228: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Appendix

10-14

Using electro transistor to input signal of +24V common point/common collector mode

When use the +24V inside power source, Input signals are connected in PNP transistor.(+24V common point/common collector mode)

[Factory settings]

X6

+24V 8mA

注3

+24V

~~

Diagram 10.10 +24V common point/common collector mode

Page 229: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Appendix

10-15

Using electro transistor and external power source to

input signal of 0V common point/common emitter mode

Input signal are connect sequentially (0V common point/common emitter mode) through NPN transistor. When use the +24V external power source:

Diagram 10.11 0V common point/common emitter mode(+24V external power source)

Page 230: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Appendix

10-16

Use connect point to output, output of open circuit collector

The following indicates the wire connection example of connect point and output of open circuit collector.

Diagram 10.12 using connect point to output

Page 231: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Appendix

10-17

■Parameter Setting Table

The parameter type and factory setup are collected to form tables, the initialized value are from setting OP4 as “0”.

Table 10.2 parameter Table (take 400V class 7.5kW as example)

Parameter

NO. Name

Factory

setting

Set

value

Parameter

NO. Name

Factory

setting

Set

value

OP1. parameter access password

1*1 0000 B1.04. frequency instruction selection

OP2. parameter access password

2*1 0000 B1.05.

Analog instruction giving

mode

OP3. Self-learning *1 3 B1.06. select act below lowest output

frequency

OP4. initialization *1 0 B1.07. reversing prohibition

OP5. clear malfunction record*1 - B1.08. reaccelerating prohibition

OP6. Trial operations*1 - B1.09. DC braking current

OP7. Write default parameters *1 - B1.10. DWELL frequency during

starting

OP8. System password*1 B1.11. DWELL time during starting

OP9. default*1 B2.01. speed searching choice 0

A1.01. Drive capacity B2.02. speed search act current 100

A1.02. Drive type series B2.03. speed search detection time 1.0

A1.03. Power voltage class B2.04. speed search waiting time 0.50

A1.04. PG card type B2.05. Recovering time of DC voltage 2.0

A1.05. Motor type B2.06. search mode of magnetic pole

original position 0

A1.06. Encoder type B2.07. testing displacement threshold

of magnetic pole 1.0

A2.01. Motor control mode C1.01. acceleration time 1 2.50

A2.02. Carrier frequency C1.02. deceleration time 1 2.50

A2.03. Carrier frequency upper limit C1.03. acceleration time 2 5.00

A2.04. Carrier frequency lower limit C1.04. deceleration time 2 5.00

A2.05. Complex current mode C1.05. acceleration time 3 2.00

A3.01. Running mode C1.06. deceleration time 3 2.00

A3.02. Function enabled C1.07. acceleration time 4 2.00

A3.03. Programmable menu hidden C1.08. deceleration time 4 2.00

B1.01. running instruction selection 1 C1.09. abnormal stop deceleration

time 2.0

B1.02. running mode selection 1 C1.10. acceleration time switching

frequency 0.00

B1.03. stop method choice 0 C1.11. deceleration time switching

frequency 0.00

Parameter Name Factory Set Parameter Name Factory Set

Page 232: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Appendix

10-18

NO. setting value NO. setting value

C1.12. Acceleration and deceleration

time selection enabled E1.01. Fundamental frequency(Hz) 50.00

C2.01. acceleration start corner time 0.90 E1.02. Maximum output voltage(V) 380.0

C2.02. acceleration end corner time 0.60 E1.03. Middle output frequency(Hz) 3.00

C2.03. Deceleration start corner

time 0.60 E1.04. Middle output voltage (V) 15.0

C2.04. deceleration end corner time 0.90 E1.05. lowest output frequency(Hz) 1.50

C3.01. Min base closure time 0.30 E1.06. lowest output voltage(V) 9.0

C3.02. DC braking time for start 0.20 E2.01. Rated power of motor*2 7.50

C3.03. Opening floodgate delay time 0.50 E2.02. Number of poles *2 4

C3.04. Starting delay time 0.50 E2.03. Rated current of motor *2 19.50

C3.05. DC braking time for stop E2.04.

Rated voltage of motor(rated

inductive potential of motor)

*2

360

C3.06. Stop output transition time E2.05. Rated frequency of motor *2 50.00

C3.07. Output contactor action delay

time E2.06.

rated rotating speed of motor

*2 1450

D1.01. Frequency instruction1 0.00 E2.07. No load current of motor *2 9.50

D1.02. Frequency instruction 2 0.00 E2.08 rated slip of motor*2 1.60

D1.03. Frequency instruction 3 0.00 E2.09. Interline resistance of motor *2 1.15

D1.04. Frequency instruction 4 0.00 E2.10. Motor leakage resistance %*2 18.0

D1.05. Frequency instruction 5 0.00 E2.11. Motor saturation

coefficient1*2

D1.06. Frequency instruction 6 0.00 E2.12. Motor saturation

coefficient2*2

D1.07. Frequency instruction 7 0.00 E2.13. Excitation current-decay

limit*2

D1.08. Frequency instruction 8 0.00 E3.01. Fundamental frequency(Hz) 50.00

D1.09. jogging frequency 6.00 E3.02. Maximum output voltage(V) 380.0

D2.01. Maximum output

frequency(FMAX) 50.00 E3.03. Middle output frequency(Hz) 3.00

D2.02. upper limit of frequency 100.00 E3.04. Middle output voltage (V) 15.0

D2.03. Lower limit of frequency 0.00 E3.05. lowest output frequency(Hz) 1.50

D2.04. filtering time for frequency

instruction 10 E3.06. lowest output voltage(V) 9.0

D2.05. Instruction source of frequency

upper limit 0 E4.01. Rated power of motor*2 7.50

D3.01. jump frequency 1 0.00 E4.02. Number of poles *2 4

D3.02. jump frequency 2 0.00 E4.03. Rated current of motor *2 19.50

D3.03. jump frequency amplitude 0.00 E4.04.

Rated voltage of motor(rated

inductive potential of motor)

*2

360

E4.05. Rated frequency of motor *2 50.00

Parameter Name Factory Set Parameter Name Factory Set

Page 233: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Appendix

10-19

NO. setting value NO. setting value

E4.06. rated rotating speed of motor

*2 1450 H1.01. Function of X3 1

E4.07. No load current of motor *2 9.50 H1.02. Function of X4 2

E4.08 rated slip of motor*2 1.60 H1.03. Function of X5 3

E4.09. Interline resistance of motor *2 1.15 H1.04. Function of X6 4

E4.10. Motor leakage resistance %*2 18.0 H1.05. Function of X7 21

E4.11. Motor saturation coefficient1*2 H1.06. Function of X8 24

E4.12. Motor saturation coefficient2*2 H1.07. Function of X9

E4.13. Excitation current-decay limit*2 H1.08. Function of X10

E5.01. high speed proportion gain 20 H2.01. Function of M1 8

E5.02. low speed proportion gain 30 H2.02. Function of Y1 2

E5.03. starting proportion gain 30 H2.03. Function of Y2 1

E5.04. high speed integration time 500 H2.04. Function of Y3

E5.05. low speed integration time 100 H2.05. Function of ouput terminal 4

E5.06. staring integration time 50 H3.01. Signal type of analog input 1

E5.07. ASR switching frequency 50.00 H3.02. Input gain of analog input 1 100.0

E5.08. Upper limit of integrating 100 H3.03. Input deviation of analog input 1 0.0

E5.09 Torque filter time 1.0 H3.04. Signal type of analog input 2

E5.10. Drive torque upper limit 150.0 H3.05. Input gain of analog input 2 100.0

E5.11. Braking torque upper limit 150.0 H3.06. Input deviation of analog input 2 0.0

E5.12. Source of torque upper limit 0 H3.07. Signal type of analog input 3

E5.13 Torque limit changing time 1.00 H3.08. Input gain of analog input 3 100.0

E5.14. Deceleration gain reduction % 0 H3.09. Input deviation of analog input 3 0.0

E5.15. Vibraion inhibition% for

sensorless vector control 0 H3.10. Analog input filter time 10

E5.16. Position servo gain 1.0 H3.11. Analog zero threshold 0.00

E5.17. Current gain H3.12. Gain switch %

E5.18. 0Hz current gain H4.01. Monitoring item of FM 0

E6.01 Torque compensation gain 1.00 H4.02. Output gain of FM 100.0

E6.02 Torque compensation delay time 200 H4.03. Output deviation of FM 0.0

E6.03 Slip compensaion enabled 0 H4.04. Monitoring item of AM 0

E6.04 Slip compensation in

regeneration 0 H4.05. Output gain of AM 100.0

E6.05. Slip compensation delay time 200 H4.06. Output deviation of AM 0.0

E6.06. Torque compensaion gain H5.01. Pulse number of PG 1024

H5.02. PG filter time 3.0

H5.03. PG phase sequence 0

H5.04. Mode of frequency divided 0

Parameter Name Factory Set Parameter Name Factory Set

Page 234: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Appendix

10-20

NO. setting value NO. setting value

H5.05. Frequency divided raio 4 J3.01. Timer On delay time 0.0

H5.06. Function of Z phase 0 J3.02. Timer OFF delay time 0.0

H5.07. deviated electrical angle of

encoder 0.0 J3.03. Timer 2ON delay time 0.0

H8.01. CAN BUS enabled 0 J3.04. Timer 2OFF delay time 0.0

H8.02. CAN communication rate 1440 J4.01. Positioning angle of principal

axis 0.0

H8.03. CAN ID 100.0 J4.02. Range of Positioning accuracy 0.5

H8.04. Extended CAN ID 0.00 J4.03. number of equal amount 1

H8.05. CAN message filter 0.10 J4.04. Reduction ratio 1.000

H8.06. Extended CAN message filter 0 L1.01. Motor overload protection

enabled 1

H8.07. Standard frame/extended frame 1440 L1.02. Motor overload protecting time 1.0

H8.08. Input address 1440 L1.03. Protection mode of motor

overheat 0

H8.09. Input variable number 1440 L1.04. Protecting time of motor

overheat 10

H8.10. Output address 1 1440 L1.05. Protection temperature of motor

overheat

H8.11. Output address 2 1440 L1.06. Resistance type for motor

temperature

H8.12. Output address 3 1440 L2.01. Protection for heatsink overheat 1

H8.13. Output address 4 1440 L2.02. Protection temperature for

heatsink overheat 85

J1.01. Zero speed threshold frequency 0.50 L2.03. Protection time for heatsink

overheat 10

J1.02. Frequency when speed

consistence 0.00 L3.01. Protection for over torque 0

J1.03. Frequency amplitude when

speed consistence 2.00 L3.02.

Protection threshold of over

torque 150.0

J2.01. Compensation way of torque

deviation 0 L3.03. Detecting time of over torque 1.0

J2.02. Braking forward(no-load

up)torque compensation 0.0 L4.01. Stall protection enabled 1

J2.03. Dragging reverse(no-load

down)torque compensation 0.0 L4.02.

Frequency threshold of stall

protection% 10

J2.04. Dragging forward (full-load

up)torque compensation 0.0 L4.03. Stall protection time 0.50

J2.05. Braking reverse (full-load

down)torque compensation 0.0 L4.04. Over speed protection enabled 1

J2.06. Torque compensation direction

when start up 0.20 L4.05.

Frequency threshold of over

speed protection % 105

L4.06. Over speed protection time 0.50

Parameter Name Factory Set Parameter Name Factory Set

Page 235: SUMPO ELECTRICCO., LTD.bestotomasyon.com/depo/files/L380User manualv3_0.pdf · The following is the overall dimension of the drive ((5.5—18.5KW)) Table 1.3 Size (mm) and gross weight

Appendix

10-21

NO. setting value NO. setting value

L4.07. Stall prevention during

acceleration 0 L6.01. Input phase missing protection 1

L4.08. stall prevention threshold

during acceleration % 150 L6.02.

Voltage threshold of input

phase missing protection 20

L4.09. stall prevention limit during

acceleration % 50 L6.03.

Output phase missing

protection 0

L4.10. stall prevention when running 0 O1.01. STOP key enabled 0

L4.11. stall prevention threshold when

running % 160 O1.02. Running direction of operator 0

L4.12. Over voltage mode when

deceleration 0 O1.03.

Frequency giving method of

operator 0

L5.01. protecting function of PG

disconnection 1 O2.01. Monitoring item 1 setting 1

L5.02. PG wrong phase protection 0 O2.02. Monitoring item 2 setting 2

L5.03. Detecting action of Z phase

rectifying error 0 O2.03. Monitoring item 3 setting 5

L5.04. Detecting threshold of Z phase

rectifying error 100 O2.04. Unit of frequency instruction 0

L5.05. Detecting times of Z phase

rectifying error 0.5 O2.05.

Display mode of motor

displacement 0

*1. Can not be initialized

*2. Factory setting varied with the different drive capacities.